YFP 397: The Art of Rebalancing: Maintaining Your Investment Portfolio


Tim Baker, CFP®, RICP®, RLP® and Tim Ulbrich, PharmD discuss the importance of maintaining a balanced asset allocation, the nuances of risk tolerance and capacity, and the different accounts you should be rebalancing.

Brought to you by First Horizon.

Episode Summary

In this episode, Tim Baker, CFP®, RICP®, RLP®, and Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, explore the essentials of rebalancing your investment portfolio.

Tim and Tim discuss asset allocation, risk tolerance, and key accounts to rebalance. They also highlight common mistakes and effective rebalancing strategies for long-term investment success.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:16] Introduction to Rebalancing Your Investment Portfolio
  • [01:34] Defining Asset Allocation and Rebalancing
  • [02:43] The Importance of Rebalancing
  • [04:37] Accounts to Consider for Rebalancing
  • [09:23] Risk Tolerance vs. Risk Capacity
  • [17:44] Common Mistakes in Rebalancing
  • [22:43] Timing Your Rebalancing
  • [25:38] Conclusion and Financial Planning Services

Episode Highlights

“ What we’re really talking about here is like maintaining the amount of risk that you feel comfortable with.” –  Tim Baker [1:04]

“ Rebalancing is the process of realigning the asset allocation of your investments to maintain whatever your desired level of risk is.” – Tim Baker [2:30]

“ But the question behind that is like, Where are we going with these investment accounts? What’s the overarching goal? What’s the target amount that we’re trying to achieve?” – Tim Ulbrich [7:06]

“ The longer time horizon that you have, the more capacity that you have to take risk because the more likely that that portfolio can recover over those 30 years.” – Tim Baker [11:06]

“ Risk tolerance is what you want to take. That’s kind of your emotional response. The risk capacity is what you should or need to take.” – Tim Baker [11:54]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, glad to have you back on the show.

Tim Baker: Good to be back with what’s new, Tim.

Tim Ulbrich: I think this is back to back, right? It’s been a while, uh, since we’ve done a back to back. So last week we talked about couples working together with their finances, certainly a relevant and important topic. And today we’re going to go pretty narrow and pretty nerdy.

Uh, as we talk about rebalancing your investment portfolio and Tim, let me start with that. We talk a lot [00:03:00] about. our savings rate and how much we’re going to save and how much we need to save for retirement. And sometimes what we lose in that conversation, certainly not with clients when our team’s doing this one on one, but maybe in a broader education sense is how we actually allocate those assets.

Where, where do those dollars go? And then what do we do when that asset allocation perhaps get it out of whack over time, which is our topic, uh, with rebalancing. So I think, I think naturally there can be a focus on the accumulation, but we might lose some of those details along the way.

Tim Baker: Yeah. I mean, it’s an important thing to consider because what we’re really talking about here is like maintaining the amount of risk that you feel comfortable with, with, and for a lot of people are like, I don’t even know what you’re talking about. So I’m just putting in a target date fund. Um, so if you’re in a target date fund, Um, you know, primarily this episode won’t apply to you, but if you’re kind of pulling the strings and want a little bit more precision, um, want to pay a little bit less, that’s one of the, the, the, the beast that I have with target a fund, this’ll [00:04:00] be an episode to kind of tune in and, and, and listen to in terms of, you know, at least how we approach it.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s start with just defining rebalancing and maybe at the same time, define asset allocation, because those are going to go hand in hand.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so asset allocation is really just the percentages between stocks and bonds, um, at a high level. Um, so. Um, you know, if you’re, if you’re in, say, an 80 20, um, portfolio, that means 80 percent is in stock. So you think traditionally more exponential growth, um, you know, more, more stocks and an accumulation phase.

And then bonds are, I, we typically explain as more like linear growth, which is where you’re, you know, it’s fixed income, you’re, you’re being set, you know, being paid, um, you know, interest and those types of things. So typically the higher the bonds, the more risk. Um, avoidant you are. Um, and typically this is for people that are approaching retirement or in retirement.

So the percentage of stocks and bonds is really what we’re talking about with [00:05:00] that asset allocation. Rebalancing is the process of realigning the asset allocation of your investments to maintain whatever your desired level of risk is. And, you know, return. So over time, Tim, Tim. The market fluctuates, obviously it goes up and down and certain investments may grow faster than others.

So this causes your portfolio to drift from its original target allocation. So give me an example. Let’s say your target allocation is fairly conservative. It’s 6040. So 60 percent in stocks and 40 percent in bonds, a strong stock market, which we’ve been experiencing lately, um, over the last couple of years, although volatile could shift that to a 7030.

Um, ratio. So if you’re in a buy and hold strategy, which is basically you, you buy and set it and forget it, you’re going to continue to drift 20, um, which, which ultimately increases your portfolio’s risk. So what rebalancing [00:06:00] basically involves is selling some of the stocks and buy in bonds to return it back to that original 60, 40.

So basically. You know, you sign up for a certain amount of risk, you know, whether you’re working with advisor or just in your own mind and as the market does what it does the You know the percentages shift and you just want to basically reset that so In the event, you know, I always kind of think about in the event of um, you know the market taking a significant downturn Um, you’re protected as much as you can be with the the percentages that you signed up for.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And for the DIYers out there, right? This is something they have to keep on, on their radar to come back to at some frequency. You know what, whatever that might be determined, or of course, we’re big advocates of, Hey, this is one of the many things that a financial planner can help you with. Like, I, I selfishly know that, hey, I’ve got Kim, uh, on our side, you know, in our corner, one of our CFPs, that like, I’m not thinking about risk.

You know, I’m not thinking about the rebalancing, you know, of course we’re constantly re [00:07:00] evaluating what are the goals, what’s the risk tolerance, what’s the risk capacity, but that aspect’s being taken care of as naturally market fluctuations will happen. So Tim, what accounts should people be thinking about here with rebalancing?

You know, perhaps the obvious people are thinking, Oh yeah, my 401k, but it’s, it’s bigger than that. Right, 

Tim Baker: Yeah, it’s pretty much all of your investment accounts. So, um You know, IRAs, HSAs, if you’re invested in your HSA, 401ks, 403bs, TSPs, brokerage accounts, um, you know, and, and, and to kind of drill down a little bit more, Tim, it’s not just like. You know, stocks and bonds. You, if you look in the equity side of your portfolio, you know, it could be that small, small cap has performed, you know, outperformed.

So, you know, we have to sell some off the, some of the small part, a small cap to maybe redeploy that to a merging market or an international exposure. So, um, but it really is anything that you have. You know, investments, right? Which could be IRAs, HSAs, [00:08:00] 401ks, brokerage account. Um, these are the, these are the accounts that you want to pay the most attention to.

Now, I would say that 401ks, Are typically less, there’s a less of a need to rebalance a 401k. And the reason for that is typically 401ks are contributing to every pay cycle. So if you get paid 24 times a year, every time some of your paycheck goes in, it’s almost like a natural rebalance, right? There’s still some drift there.

And it’s still important to look at this because oftentimes this is the biggest asset that many of us have outside of maybe a home. Um, so it’s a big asset on the, on the balance sheet that needs attention, but, but oftentimes you kind of have that natural rebalance because of how regular the contributions are made into your 401k.

Tim Ulbrich: And I would add to this, you know, you mentioned kind of the, the various accounts, right? So 401ks, IRAs, [00:09:00] TSBs, 403Bs, HSAs, 529s would fall in there, right? As well. If we’re,

Tim Baker: Yeah, 457s. Yep, exactly right.

Tim Ulbrich: I think too. It’s worth mentioning this. I’m thinking of the DIY or in particular where, where I often see this overlooked him that there’s a question behind this question that we can’t overlook.

Right? So the question we’re addressing is what is rebalancing? And we’ll talk some about the strategies, what accounts need rebalancing and ultimately how does that connect and relate to your risk tolerance and capacity, all important stuff. But the question behind that is like, Where are we going with these investment accounts?

What’s the overarching goal? What’s the target amount that we’re trying to achieve? And how are we balancing that with all these different goals? Once those decisions are made in those conversations happen, then within that, we can begin to think about, okay, how do we make sure we rebalance and keep on track with the plan that we set?

Tim Baker: Yeah, if you’re, [00:10:00] if you’re looking at a checklist of reviewing your financial plan. You know, this is probably item number

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: and all of the other things, you know, that are going to be important of like, Hey, where are we at? Where are we going? What’s the purpose of this are the things that we talked about, you know, last year, the year before still important.

So, I, I think this is very much the technical after all of those really value based conversations and questions are answered, but it’s important all the same. Right? So I think that. You know, um, And this changes, right? So, so what, what your, there’s so many people are like, ah, like nothing’s going on. Like I got this, but I always like do the thought experiment is like, you know, even for us, Tim, if we look back at like two years ago, how much things have changed over these last two years.

And I think as humans, we, we think. We kind of, we kind of lose sight of that and we think that the next two years are not going to be, [00:11:00] you know, kind of laissez faire type of thing. So I think, I think, yeah, the, this is, this is a, an item on a long list of things that need to be answered. And I think it’s just important to ask that question, um, kind of do that mental azimuth of like, is this still kind of serving me and what I’m trying to accomplish with my financial plan?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And I want to make sure to say that out loud and we don’t miss that because, you know, the thought that was coming to mind, Tim, that stimulated that, that comment was there’s a lot of work that has to be done to determine what percentage of our income are we saving and why are we saving it? And then within that conversation, what vehicles are we going to use?

And then within that conversation, there’s the risk tolerance, risk capacity rebalancing. So making sure we just don’t get lost in the weeds, right? Especially for people that are, that are DIY in this. Um, let’s talk. I keep throwing around these terms, risk tolerance, risk capacity, but so important, right?

Because that ultimately is going to inform What is your [00:12:00] asset allocation, which will then inform, what are we going to do with the rebalance? So talk to us about risk, tolerance, risk capacity, and then even a, uh, peek behind the curtain for those that are financial planning clients, how we handle this through something like an investment policy statement.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So the way that I simply put risk tolerance versus capacity, risk capacity is risk tolerance is a risk that you want to take. The risk capacity is the risk that you should or need to take. So I’ll give you an example, you know, I could be a 35 year old pharmacist and I, I could be very risk adverse, right?

So when I take a questionnaire about how I view my investments and how I view about money, I’m like, I just want to keep, you know, I don’t want to lose anything. I just want to, you know, I’m, I’m much more comfortable putting everything into a high yield savings account and, and, and doing my thing there.

The problem is, is because we know about things with inflation and. [00:13:00] Um, uh, taxes that we have to do more than the 3 percent or whatever high yield savings accounts paying these days. Like, we have to outpace inflation. We have to outpace. Um, if you’re 35 or 40 years old or younger, or even a little bit older than that, you have more capacity.

Take risk. If we’re thinking about it in terms of retirement planning, because I might have 30 years To invest. And the idea is that the longer time horizon that you have, the more capacity that you have to take risk because the more likely that that portfolio can recover over those 30 years. So as you get closer, I could be the most, you know, so I’m, I pretty much like pretty aggressive with my investments, but once I get to, if I’m going to retire at 65, once I get to 55 or 60.

I don’t have the capacity to take the [00:14:00] risk because my time is so short. So even though I’m aggressive, you know, I need to know I, in the back of my mind, I’m, I’m fighting what’s called sequence of return risk, where if my, if I’m 58 and I’m trying to retire at 60 and I’m super aggressive. And my portfolio, you know, drops by a third.

It’s hard for me to recover in a 22 year period. So risk tolerance is what you want to take. That’s kind of your emotional response. The risk capacity is what you should or need to take. And sometimes if you’re 50 years old, 60 years old, and you’re trying to retire in the next 5 or 10 years and you haven’t done much.

Your risk, you have, you know, you have to take more risk because you have no choice or you’re going to just be working forever. So there’s, there’s this Venn diagram, Tim, of what we kind of look at your risk tolerance, which is typically a result of a questionnaire that we do. And then we overlay the demographic of how much you have saved, what your age is, what’s your time horizon.

And we come to that asset allocation [00:15:00] of, you know, the magic percentage of stocks to bonds. And then to kind of answer your question, what we typically do, um, at YFP is we just have a one page document. We call this the investment policy statement. This is kind of our North Star of how we’re going to manage your investments, both the ones that we are managing at our custodian directly, but also held away investments, which are typically 401ks or 403bs that you’re contributing directly, you know, cause you’re still employed.

Um, so that investment policy statement is kind of like our instruction manual of how we’re going to, you know, what the asset allocation is, how we’re going to rebalance. You know, the, how you, how you have visibility yet that you’ll receive statements and all that kind of stuff. So it’s really kind of a, a, um, North star of how we’re going to handle the investments that gives us kind of a, a scalable way to manage millions of dollars for our clients, but also for the client to understand, okay, this is what the [00:16:00] team at YFP, this is how they’re, they’re handling, you know, my long term investments, et cetera.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that helps people, especially if they’re new to that relationship, feel comfortable, like, hey, we’ve been through the evaluation of risk process. We’ve agreed upon these set of terms, but I’m also, in part, delegating. This work to the team I hired, but I’m delegating this work to the team that I hired within the sandbox we’ve agreed upon.

Um, which I think is, is really important. And I love your visual, the Venn diagram, right? Because I think it encompasses when we talk about risk capacity, risk tolerance. Yes. We’re thinking about the emotional part, how much risk can I stomach, but we’re also considering how much risk do I need to take Based on all these goals.

And that’s where a third party can really have a valuable role of like, let’s talk about both of those things and where there may be differences. Let’s have a conversation and kind of figure out what gives, right? Are we willing to push ourselves maybe a little bit in a direction that we weren’t thinking, or are we willing to adjust the goals?

Oh, [00:17:00] 2 people doing this partner spouses, thinking of others, you might have 2 different. Risk tolerances and risk capacities that you’re dealing with and to have those conversations can be really valuable.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And I think one of the things that I, you know, ultimately say, you know, when I was working with clients back in the day is at the end of the day, it’s your financial plan. So even though I might reckon, you know, you might come in at a seven 30, a 70 30, and I think that you can be more aggressive, you know, 90, 10, or even a hundred zero, you know, all equity portfolio.

I’ve had some clients will say, like, let’s start at 80 20. And then I just say, like, I’m just forewarning you every time we meet because you’re 28 or whatever it is, like, I’m just going to bring this up that. You know, we need to be more aggressive and, you know, ultimately clients might step into that over a couple of years because I think they realize it’s, it’s working smarter, not harder because again, typically the more conservative you are, the harder you have to work, i.

  1. save. Or work longer to kind of reach that [00:18:00] portfolio amount that we can have a sustainable paycheck. So, and that goes back to, you know, in the past, I’ve talked about aggressive Jane and conservative Jane and everything being equal and the delta between their portfolio after a 30 year career is significant.

Um, and the only thing that really changes is, is the asset allocation. So it’s 1 of the most powerful things. And I think, tending to that. IE through a rebalancing strategy over time is going to be really important as well. So, um, yeah, at the end of the day, you know, you have to feel comfortable, but I think what most people realize is.

Hey, even the portfolio goes down in 2025 and I’m retiring in 2055, who cares, right? It doesn’t matter. We’re not even going to remember that. And in fact, we’re going to probably have, you know, six, seven more of those. It’s just, is this, when we get to that eye of the storm close to retirement, um, that’s when we really need to be hyper focused and conservative on the, on the asset allocation.

So we don’t, you know, again, fall to sequence of return risk.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And it’s worth noting, Tim, especially for [00:19:00] newer investors, how you think you’re going to feel and how you actually feel might not always line up. Right. Until you go through a dip where you have a sizable amount of assets and kind of experience that. I do think some people go into that thinking. Hey, I’m in this for the longterm.

I can stomach it. And it market drops 30 percent and they still feel the same way. Like that’s fine. You know, I’m in it for the long run. I think other people might go into that with that mind, same mindset, see that number go down on their accounts. And all of a sudden there’s this gut feeling of, of like, whoa, I didn’t think this would impact me in the way it did.

Tim Baker: yeah. And, and sometimes that gut feeling leads to that whole idea that I talk about is like, I want to take my investment ball and go home. And then that could lead to really. Um, the word is not inappropriate, but really, um, unproductive decisions and actions with your portfolio when you’re selling into cash, then you start feeling a little bit better because the markets recover and then you buy back into the portfolio higher.

And it’s [00:20:00] probably 1 of the biggest mistakes that novice investors make. And it’s basically playing on our loss aversion that affects all of us. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Let’s go there to common mistakes investors make when rebalancing, you’re, you’re talking about one really important one right there. And specifically, I’m thinking about the DIY investor where, Hey, when the hands in the cookie jar, you know, we might, might make some mistakes or be more prone to making mistakes than we would be otherwise.

If, if we had, um, a financial planner advisor, someone in our corner kind of talking through some of these things. So what, what are some of those mistakes that folks should be. Aware of that. Hey, we can avoid these if, if at all possible related to rebalancing.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think it’s, it’s kind of what I just said is like that emotional reaction, um, to, to this, uh, or taking a short term view of a, of a portfolio that has a long term outlook. Um, you know, I think sometimes like, and rebalance in itself seems [00:21:00] unnatural because you’re taking your highest performing asset class, some of it selling some of it and putting it potentially in your lowest performing asset class.

So it feels weird. Um, Uh, you know, again, if you’re overwatching your portfolio, it could lead to you making irrational decisions to time the market, which we know over the course of a long investing career, you just can’t do. Um, You know, I think the other thing is not considering the shifts in risk tolerance over time.

Right? So if, if you set this and forget it early in your career, and then your mid career and late career, and you’re still in that same asset allocation, there’s a problem there. Um, and I think, I think the other thing too, that is kind of related to this, but tangentially so is. Like if you’re in, if you’re thinking like, oh, I’m going to target date fund.

I don’t have to worry about that. Like in my 401k, that is true to an degree. But the, the other thing is like, we’ve talked about like, not all HSAs or 401ks are create equal, not all target date funds are created equal. [00:22:00] So you could be in a 2060 target date fund. That’s actually too conservative to what you actually need to be in.

And even, you know, all of those as they lead up and they had to have this glide path of, you know, taking out equities and re you know, re um, reinvested in the, in the, Stocks and bond or, uh, bonds. It’s, it’s not necessarily lines up with what you’re thing, it’s all those, it’s the easy button. I would think.

I would say look at the fees and look at the, the actual asset allocation within that fund to make a good decision. Um, I also think not considering tax cons, consequences in certain accounts or chasing something because of a tax benefit. So the big, the big thing that we haven’t talked here, um, is like rebalance is, is different in a brokerage account versus a.

401k or an IRA. Um, and what I mean by that is we’ve always talked about like the, the tax benefits of a 401k or, or an IRA or a Roth IRA, the, in those accounts, [00:23:00] the money that is in those accounts is either tax going in, so that’s in the case of a Roth or tax going out, which is the case of the, the traditional, the, the added tax.

Um in a brokerage account is that when you buy and sell a Stock bond mutual fund inside of a 401k you pay no capital gains. So the growth is tax free, which is which is another benefit Um of those accounts inside of a brokerage account you’re paying capital gains on any gain or or loss Um in the side of those accounts.

So sometimes we do weird things because of tax Ramifications and I think it’s losing, not losing sight of that, you know, as well. And then, um, I think also kind of related to this, Tim is, is account location. So this is kind of related to rebalancing, but having a good amount of, you know, I just, we just signed on a client, um, recently that they’re in [00:24:00] their early forties, forties, they want to retire in their early fifties.

So they have about a decade left, but they have nothing in a brokerage account. Um, which is typically what we’re going to use for an early retirement paycheck. So this is kind of the do we have a Do we have enough in? Uh, a taxable pre tax than an after tax to basically build a sustainable paycheck. So not necessarily related directly to rebalancing, but important to know again, as you’re asking yourself those questions and we’re getting to that 80 second step of rebalancing that we, we could look at the situation and be like, our account location is off.

So we need to, we need to reallocate assets that way. And then obviously rebalance the portfolio in general. 

Tim Ulbrich: That’s a great example, right? Because that’s one of those in the weeds types of things where we can be, you know, neat, neat, deep, and trying to rebalance within an account, thinking about the asset allocation, maybe even trying to think about some of the tax benefits, especially if it’s not in a retirement account all the while, you know, bigger question of, Hey, might I.

Need these funds [00:25:00] prior to traditional retirement age. And do we have the right account locations? A really good example of, of the bigger, the bigger puzzle that we need to be thinking about.

Tim Baker: Yeah,

Tim Ulbrich: Last question I have for you here is on timing, Tim. So we’ve established that, Hey, once we set an Alice asset allocation based on risk tolerance, based on risk capacity, based on goals, that risks, that asset allocation will inevitably shift as the market does its thing over time, which then.

Puts in the, the need for what we’re talking about here, which is rebalancing. Um, so then the next natural question is, well, how often should I do that? Is this a once a year? Is this a twice a year? Is this a, it depends based on market volatility and you know, some seasons of the market may be more volatile than others.

What are your thoughts here on timing?

Tim Baker: yeah. So typically, the three common approaches to rebalancing is time based rebalancing, which is kind of what you’re talking about. So rebalance at regular interviews, you know, I quarterly, annually, maybe in semi annually, it could be [00:26:00] threshold based rebalancing, which is rebalancing when an asset class deviates from the target by a certain percentage.

So if it drifts 5 percent or 10 percent Transcribed by https: otter. ai Then we rebalance and then there’s a hybrid approach. So combining time and threshold methods for more flexibility back in the day, Tim, this was a concern because, um, and even, I think even today it’s a concern depending on how you’re invested is, um, you know, we, we would rebalance in, in my previous firm, we would rebalance like mutual funds.

We didn’t use ETFs, which is what we use now. And those would generate like. Ticket charge and commissions. Um, and some of the listeners might have heard of things called like churning where an advisor is kind of selling, not unnecessarily, but in a rebalancing to kind of earn a commission. Um, and even like even ETFs or stocks, anytime that you, you buy and sell, sometimes there’s a ticket charge.

Now, a lot of those have kind of gone to zero. So you’re able to, to do this kind of at will. [00:27:00] Um, Um, but that was a, that was a, that was a, something that you had to be aware of back in the day of either, you know, what’s the ticket charge related to the trade or like, what’s the commission that you’re going to pay an advisor?

Um, so obviously being fee only, we don’t earn commission since that’s not part of what we do. Um, today, a lot of these, a lot of these methods are going to be. Threshold based. Um, so if you’re working with a robo advisor, it’s going to, it’s going to look at a drift at a certain percentage and then basically realign you.

Obviously, you’re paying a fee for that, which you need to know what that is. Um, but we kind of do a hybrid approach of, of both. Um, you know, some people, Okay. Want to overdo this and rebalance this, you know, if you’re a tinkerer and that’s typically not the best approach. So I would say at a minimum, at a minimum, you know, at least once a year you should be looking at this and rebalancing back to a target percentage.

And again, having those conversations with yourself about, is this what I still want and need? And how is this best supported my financial plan?

Tim Ulbrich: [00:28:00] Awesome, Tim. Great, great stuff. Uh, appreciate your perspective as always. And for those that are listening and saying, Hey, I could use help with rebalancing asset allocation, making sure I’m thinking about my risk tolerance, risk capacity, and other investing goals, as well as other parts of the financial plan.

That’s what our team of fee only certified financial planners do at YFP. Again, we’re talking about a very narrow aspect of the financial plan and there’s so much more opportunity Beyond just this topic. As we look at all of the different parts of the financial plan, whether that’s investing in retirement planning, whether that be debt management, credit, estate planning, insurance, and so on.

So to learn more about what it means and what it would look like to work one on one with a YFP fee only certified financial planner, head on over to our website, yourfinancialpharmacist. com. You’ll see an option there to book a discovery call. We’d love to have an opportunity to talk with you, learn more about your financial situation.

You can learn more about our services and ultimately we can determine together. Whether or not there’s a good fit there again, your financial pharmacist. com and click on the link to book a [00:29:00] discovery call. Thanks so much for listening. Have a great rest of your week.[00:30:00] 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 396: Managing Money Together: Strategies for Couples


In this episode, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RICP®, RLP® dive into the challenges and rewards of managing money in a relationship.

Episode Summary

In this episode, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, and Tim Baker, CFP®, RICP®, RLP® dive into the challenges and rewards of managing money in a relationship.

They break down how different approaches—whether merging finances completely, keeping some things separate, or managing everything individually—can impact your financial harmony. Through real-life insights, Tim and Tim highlight the power of open communication, understanding each other’s money habits, and creating a shared financial vision. They also discuss when and how a neutral third party can help navigate tough conversations.

No matter where you are in your relationship—just starting out, engaged, or years into marriage—this episode offers practical advice to help you and your partner build a financial plan that works for both of you.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:00] Introduction and Setting the Stage
  • [00:56] Poll Results and Initial Reactions
  • [02:06] Cultural and Societal Influences on Financial Management
  • [03:21] Personal Experiences and Financial Dynamics
  • [04:36] Client Trends and Financial Planning
  • [08:06] Understanding Money Personalities
  • [21:11] Pros and Cons of Merged vs. Separate Finances
  • [30:42] Starting Financial Conversations
  • [31:43] Joint vs. Separate Accounts
  • [32:31] Managing Household Finances
  • [33:57] Setting Financial Goals
  • [35:45] The Importance of a Financial Plan
  • [36:47] Cultural Differences in Financial Planning
  • [40:20] The Role of a Third Party in Financial Planning
  • [42:25] Balancing Present and Future Wealth
  • [49:51] Creating a Shared Vision
  • [59:20] The Value of Financial Planning Services

Episode Highlights

“There is no one right way when  it comes to managing your finances with a partner, significant  other, or spouse.” – Tim Ulbrich [0:50]

“ The more we understand how we grew up around money and how that shapes the perspective we have today, the better chance we have to be able to come together and figure out what this plan looks like going forward.” – Tim Ulbrich [10:05]

“ What I think is best is everything comes into a joint account. So all of the paychecks come into a joint account. And then I think if you do have separate accounts, some dollar amount or some percentage of that can go to  an individual account for you to do whatever you want  with.” -Tim Baker [31:43]

“ If you’re always just living a wealthy life tomorrow, what’s the freaking point?” – Tim Baker [43:37]

“M ost financial planning firms and financial planners are making financial decisions without a vision. And that is backwards.” – Tim Ulbrich [50:24]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, good to have you back on the show.

Tim Baker: Good to be back. [00:01:00] How’s it going Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: It’s going well, Valentine’s day, right around the corner. And so it’s only fitting that we talk about love and money. And let me, let me just start, Tim, before we get into the weeds on this, that we are coming from our experience and perspective. And of course, we’re going to talk about a broader perspective, hopefully in different options that people can consider as they’re working with a significant other spouse or partner to manage their finances.

But inevitably. We have a bias of what has worked for us, right? For Jess and I, and for you and Shay. And so we’re going to try to broaden that perspective, but I think it’s important that we acknowledge that right up front and that there is no one right way when it comes to managing your finances with a partner, significant other, or spouse.

And Tim, I want to start by getting your take on a poll I recently. Posted on LinkedIn. And I asked the following question for those that are working with someone else on their finances, which of the following best describes your situation is everything merged or something’s merged, something separate, or is everything separate?

And about [00:02:00] half people said everything was merged. 40 percent said some merged, some separate, and about 10 percent responded that nothing was merged and everything was just separate. What, what are your thoughts on that? Does that match with what you hear typically from, from clients and prospects? Hmm.

Tim Baker: think that the The half of everything merged seems really high to me Like I didn’t I didn’t expect that at all. Um, and I think the the 10 percent um You know where nothing is in merge is merged seems pretty low to me

Tim Ulbrich: Interesting.

Tim Baker: I thought I thought that we would see more of an even dish like not an even distribution, but um, the the all merged Is something I don’t want to say I rarely come across but like I feel like the most common the most common is some merge some separate

Tim Ulbrich: Mm hmm.

Tim Baker: in my experience, so I was a little bit surprised when I saw that poll um but that was the outcome because again, I I think most I think [00:03:00] most and I think I think a lot of like our culture and just how like how we We operate these days of affects this right like we’re getting married later.

Tim Ulbrich: Mm hmm.

Tim Baker: you know, I know I’ve talked about my wife being brazilian like in her culture You you know You you live at home until you get married and I know that some some people here in the united states do that too right, so like um, I think some of some of like well just what’s going on with our Socioeconomics like it’s it’s has changed this but I think by and large I probably see more of a hybrid model Which I think we’ll talk about here in this episode

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. I think your point about, you know, timeline of when people get married or when they have a significant other spouse and that shifting is significant, you know, again, speaking from my perspective or Jess and I, we got married relatively young, 24. Uh, and so we didn’t, neither of us had really a strong process of our own.

Right. So it kind of made sense. And, and we’re in, I guess what you’re calling kind of that, that where a smaller group where everything is merged, [00:04:00] but that would have been very different. I think if we got married at 30 or 35, right. And we were doing things on our own for a while.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think very, and then I also like, like divorce, right, too, if you’ve experienced that, like your, your, especially if there’s money things that have come out of like, you know, so I think if people have been in serious relationships, and then, you know, are not, and then are in another serious relationship later, like, I think, or, you know, I know, divorce can be traumatic, or just trauma with finances growing up, I know, you got one, just like things, you know, with your family business and things like that, I think there’s all paints, Part of how we, how we look at this.

Um, so yeah, I, I know there’s some people that have gone through, you know, relationships. It’s like, I’m, I’ll never merge again. You know, our finances, like it has to be separate. Now they’re still working and trying to row the boat in the, in the same direction, so to speak. But there has to be kind of a little bit of a separation for them to feel comfortable.

And I, I understand that. And again, it’s not necessarily [00:05:00] something that I’ve had to deal with personally, but. Um, I get where that, where that can come from.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And to be clear, this is not a scientific Gallup poll, right? This was a poll I just put out there and LinkedIn. I do think we had, I’ll have to go back and look. I think there was 150, 170 people that responded. So it was a sizable group, but certainly not representative of a larger group. Tim, the other thing I wanted to just get your pulse on, because you sit in front of prospective clients every day where you’re having conversations in a very intimate way about their finances as they try to Discover or learn more about our services, see if they’re a good fit.

And as a part of that, naturally you get a inside peek and everything that’s going on, you know, financially. And of course doing that confidentially is you aggregate some of those conversations. What, what are some of the trends that you are seeing? You know, is it what one person who’s typically initiating this conversation and they’re, you know, they’re dragging someone along to be there.

Is it maybe one person who’s making all the [00:06:00] decisions and the second person’s not there at all, or do you see. more cases where it’s, it’s really a shared decision making process to people present at the table.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And, and, and again, probably not an even distribution, but all of those things, Tim, like, I think there’s sometimes where, um, and there, I think there might be some gender dynamics at play and I don’t want to like, you know, uh, generalize or anything, but like. Sometimes it’s, you know, a lot of pharmacists are female, so it might be like, Hey, you know, I’ve been listening to you since like our P2 year on the podcast.

So they feel like they know me or know you, but obviously I’m the one mean with them. Um, and then they might tell their husband, we’ll call husband Brian, they might tell Brian that we’re mean with Tim, um, you know, like five minutes before we actually do, and they don’t know who I am from Adam. Right. So, um, You know, there’s some people that are that are both like in it and and most of the time when I asked a question Like hey, like when you hire a financial planner, like who is the decision maker?

Who are the stakeholders? Like a the overwhelming answer. It’s like it’s the two of us, right? We’re gonna be we’re gonna you know, [00:07:00] basically make this decision together now who takes point and who? Might be our main contact that can differ. Um It’s really really hard at least in in where with what we do to work and this is one of the things that happens a lot and i’m i’m i’m Sometimes unsure how to navigate where you know a person will book a meeting They said that i’m married, but i’m looking for a financial planner just for me And I think again we look at the whole picture.

Typically. We’re not looking at just like a project here and there We’re looking at a holistic kind of longitudinal relationship and sometimes it’s hard If the, if the partner isn’t represented in that. And I, I would say at a minimum, like I want, I need, we need to know like what the joint balance sheet is, right?

We know that like retirement accounts, they’re always individualized. You have an IRA in your name, Tim, right? Uh, you know, there’s a 401k in, you know, Shay’s name, like that type of thing. Like those are not joint accounts. Um. But we want the joint, we want the individual and the [00:08:00] shared balance sheet there, and then we also want like the shared goals, right?

What are we, and again, you could have a goal of, I want to do this and this, and Jessica would have a goal. I want to do that and that, and then we can have shared goals. And I think those have to be in the plan or we’re not really not doing you justice. Right? So all of the things that you mentioned, um, are.

Are are present right and I try to weed out people that are going to be less engaged because again like We want people that are engaged that take our advice for the most part You know, we we feel like the advice that we give is in your best interest. That is the client’s financial plan um But you know both partners are are somewhat, you know plugged into what’s going on but uh, yeah, it can be all over the map right and um You know, it’s just interesting to see how people approach.

And, um, again, people have, I don’t know if we talk about this, but people have different money personalities in terms of how they view money, you know, what, how they’re raised [00:09:00] around money, what is the vocabulary for money, like all that kind of stuff. And again, some, some of that could just be inherent to how, you know, how they are, it could be also like the environment in which they grew up in.

Tim Ulbrich: And I wanna start there, Tim, because I think before we talk about strategies or ways that people may think about. Working on their finances together. I think it’s so important that we first just recognize and understand and reflect on how did we grow up around money? And, you know, what I, what I call kind of know thyself in terms of the money personality, because when you bring two different money personalities together.

Right. Even if you end up having accounts that are, let’s say, completely separate or some combination of merge or separate, and we’ll talk about that more detail here in a little bit, inevitably, there’s going to be conversations where things start to overlap. You mentioned kind of shared goals and visions, and we all come with different money perspectives that shape our money personalities that we have today and what I have found, and I’m making this sound much easier [00:10:00] than it is for the sake of just the time on the podcast, like Jess and I came from very different money personalities.

And it took us a while. I think to really be able to articulate that out loud and say, Hey, these are the strengths that I bring to the table growing up in this environment. And these are the weaknesses that I bring to the table growing up in this environment. And I really felt like that took the pressure off some of the conversation that, you know, we can think about, Hey, because we grew up in this environment and our family maybe budgeted this way, or in my finance, my, my household growing up, everything was merged and I have vivid memories.

Of how my parents did the budget and the conversations and how the small business was a part of that conversation. Of course, that shaped the perspective that I bring good and bad right perspective. And so I think I want to get your thoughts on that because my experience, my personal experience says the more we understand how we grew up around money and how that shapes the perspective we have today, the better chance we have to be able to come together and figure out what this plan looks like [00:11:00] going forward.

Tim Baker: Can I, can I put you on the hot seat, Tim? I’m interested to see, like, cause I, I view again, working with you and Jess in the past, like I view you guys as kind of like similar. In terms of like money, if you don’t mind, like walk, walk us through, like, it might, maybe this will be a good way to kind of talk a little bit about the money personalities and like what those are, but like, where, where, where do you see you?

Because so when I think about many personalities, like the umbrella, and I’ve talked about this before, is you kind of have that person that is like open hand, like more of the spender, right? And underneath that, I think that’s the. The spender, um, the risk taker, and then the other umbrella is the closed hands that people are just like saving, you know, are afraid to part with their dollars.

So that’s typically the security seeker, the saver, and then the, the, the, the person that’s kind of in the middle is the flyer, which they’re kind of more like laissez faire, like money is a thing. Like, I don’t necessarily [00:12:00] worry about it too much. It’s very easy going. And you’re kind of like. in the middle somewhere, right?

So walk me through, if you don’t mind, like what, where do you, where would you say you kind of were and then where Jess, Jess was in, in, in those, uh, you know, in the, in those personalities?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Let me reference for, for people that are interested in learning more about what you’re talking about. There’s several assessments out there, but what one that matches up with the terms that Tim’s using. Around like saver, spender, flyer, risk taker is called the five money personalities quiz. And we’ll link to that in the show notes as well.

I’ll say that I think where we have similarities, let’s start there as we, we both grew up in households where the finances were merged. Um, and we both grew up in households where I would say there was shared decision making, but one person who was clearly taking the lead. With the finances and so that that’s the similarities.

I think we’re coming with um For for better or for worse. I I would say I grew up in a household that was uh, [00:13:00] very frugal There was more of a scarcity mindset around money and very much a focus on Saving for the future trying to do everything that we can to plan and prep for the future now Some of that I think comes from growing up in a small business.

Like I have vivid memories In conversations that my parents were having, you know, I remember my mom talking about, Hey, how hard my dad is working in the business. And, you know, we, we necessarily can’t do a, B or C. Because we’re trying to save up for this vacation a year or two years in the future. I remember my mom talking about, Hey, we’re able to go on this vacation that, that we maybe did once a year, once every other year, but it was paid for by coupons and clipping coupons.

And I remember mom kind of worked in the coupons on the living room floor. Right? So those are core memories. You know, I think of inside out, right? Core memories like, and I have carried those very much in. To the way I have approached money for, for better or for worse. I think the, I think the frugality has real benefits, but I have really struggled and have had to work [00:14:00] hard to evolve and have had to have your help and the planning team’s help and Jess’s help to really get outside out of that future only mindset and that scarcity frugality mindset to loosen the reins and ask some of the questions of like, what’s the, so what if today, and how do we find this balance, right?

Of living the rich life today and in the future. And I think on the flip side, Jess. I would say grew up in a family environment where there was some stress and fear and anxiety, uh, around the money, but I think there was, uh, more of an openness to the present moment and, uh, some of the experiences that are in front of us today.

But on the flip side, there was some of that scarcity mindset towards the future. Uh, as well, but there was definitely more of a present that I think she really brings that perspective today, where, where I’m kind of balancing us out to think about tomorrow. She’s really helping us focus in the present.

Tim Baker: yeah, and I think, I think, you know, sometimes I think people think that like if you have [00:15:00] multiple personalities in a, in a planning relationship, like, so if you, if you think about the security seeker, you know, someone who values stability, planning, uh, long term financial security and the saver, you know, they have satisfaction saving money and minimize the expenses.

Like, that end of the spectrum, I think, goes a long way in a financial plan, but I think it’s good to be counterbalanced by a spender, someone who views money as a tool for enjoyment, convenience, um, maybe some immediate gratification, YOLO, I’ve kind of talked about this with my own journey, like, I’ve kind of Going back and forth on this risk taker, right?

That might be someone because again, like it’s funny you say that because like the growing up in my household Like if you ran a business like you’re a risk taker if you’re an entrepreneur, you’re a risk taker, right? And maybe not so much right? So risk taker thrives on opportunity Adventure and potential for big financial rewards and again that flyers, you know money’s not a central focus they prioritize other values like [00:16:00] Relationships or passions.

Um, I think it’s good to have, I think if you have all of one thing, if you have two savers or two people, security seeker, you’re, you’re a mess and a fortune hopefully, but for the purpose of what? Right. If you have someone that again opens the hand is spending or taking, you know, big swings and risking it all, you know We want to avoid having to like bag groceries in the future So I think having having that balance in a relationship is good And I think this changes over time like I mentioned, you know I grew up and again, my mom was a teacher.

My dad made some more money. We, we, we were fine. Right. But like my mom did the coupon thing and we scrimped and we saved. And when, if we did go out, it was, you know, we’d order a meal, no, no, no drinks, no desserts. Right. Um, so like, and they put a lot of their money into the house and like where our family spent time.

And, you know, growing up, I was in charge of [00:17:00] like, you need to get to a certain age. I was, I was working like in Russia. I was never allowed to work. Yeah. On a school night. So I’d work on the weekends. I was, I worked at an Irish restaurant where I grew up, but it was like, Hey, if you want to buy a car, like that’s on you, pal.

Like if you want insurance or gas, you know, if you want certain items, that’s on you. So I kind of, you know, fell in line with my mom who was a saver. Um, but then I, when I went into the army and nine 11 happened and it was kind of like Yolo, right? Like it was, I don’t really know if tomorrow’s going to happen.

So like that shaped. Yeah. More where I was more of a spender, right? And then I think I got positives and negatives from both things. And, and, you know, I, I’m kind of at where I am now, which is probably somewhere in the middle, I wouldn’t say I’m a flyer cause I kind of think of that as more maybe like, you know, off, but I would say I look more to the long term and, and Shay, as I’ve said on this as more like, bro, we have kids like,

Tim Ulbrich: This is the

Tim Baker: have one, yeah, this is the season.

We have one shot at this life. And I’ve kind of come around to that [00:18:00] too, because. You know, I do think that because we’re planning and we’re doing the things that we do and, and again, the numbers are, are, um, confirmed by our plan. Like, I feel more at ease. And more, um, um, comfortable spending, spending money, like, you know, especially if it’s for those things that, you know, um, are for our family and, and experiences and things like that.

But this is a hard thing too. And I, like, so we talk about the person that was, I don’t know if a lot of us just have the vocabulary ourselves to have the conversation conversations with ourselves about money versus having it with a. Uh, uh, a person, you know, that you’re in a relationship with, like, we don’t have the vocabulary ourselves.

So how can we expect, especially if we come from different places to be able to, you know, have the conversation, have the vocabulary or ask the right questions. Because again, like, you know, growing up, like money was kind of a taboo thing. Like, I never talked to my parents about how much [00:19:00] money they made, or how we, like, we never really talked, I know we would save, and I think we knew that money was a scarce thing, but, like, we didn’t really talk openly about it, um, and I think that, you know, that not having those conversations is a big deal too, so.

I think that’s why this is really important. This, this topic is really important. It’s, and it’s apropos, we’re doing this around, you know, Valentine’s days because it’s, it’s difficult for ourselves, let alone introducing a completely, you know, new set of beliefs and that type of

Tim Ulbrich: Mm hmm. So, first of all, I need you to stop hitting on people that are bagging groceries. Cause that was my first job and my, my favorite job. Uh, I loved it. I loved it. Like every time I go to the grocery store, I get to get the warm and fuzzy still. Like, I don’t know. There’s just something about like the methodical nature of it.

And I felt like it taught me a ton around communication skills, dealing with people like my mom that show up with their box of coupons. And I’m like, Oh my gosh, this is going to take forever. Right. Not now you just scan like an app and it has all [00:20:00] your coupons

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: but, um, I loved it and I’ll give my boys a hard time every once in a while.

I’ll, I’ll throw out a produce code off the top of my memory. It’s

Tim Baker: No way.

Tim Ulbrich: presses them every time. Yeah. It’s awesome. Well, I used to impress them. They’re getting too old for

Tim Baker: So did you like it because it was kind of like Tetris too? Like, like bagging

Tim Ulbrich: yeah. Like I, I can’t stand how kids these days, right? Bad groceries, like so inefficient, so inefficient, but

Tim Baker: man. Maybe, maybe we need to get you, uh, back, back. I mean, the whole point of, of, uh, financial plan is hopefully to have to avoid that, Tim. So you don’t have to moonlight. But maybe a, but maybe no hate. Maybe that’s a, maybe that’s a good kind of a sunset job. I mean, I could see, I could see that being a cool job, especially you’re talking to people.

Um, no hate on

Tim Ulbrich: I liked it.

Tim Baker: my end. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So fun fact for the YFP community, my IPMs, which is the items per minute. That’s the KPI for the cashiers. My IPMs were top at the top [00:21:00] supermarket in Western New York. So fun

Tim Baker: Whoa. That’s a quite, quite the, quite the flex.

Tim Ulbrich: but I, I think your point about emotional vocabulary is, is so important, right? Because my experience, Tim tells me that. When the emotional vocabulary isn’t there to be able to first identify yourself, where does some of these money scripts come from to then be able to initiate a conversation? This comes out sideways, right?

And I can think about some early experiences in our marriage where, you know, might, might lead to passive aggressiveness or, you know, internalizing some of what really is underneath that, which is the scarcity or the fear or the other things that has nothing or almost nothing to do with what actually is being spent.

But it’s activating an emotion that may be related to how we were brought up financially and, and being able to put a name to that, I think is so important. So let, let’s shift gears. We talked at the beginning about in terms of, of managing, [00:22:00] practically managing accounts and month to month finances, whether it’s credit cards, checking accounts, you know, some, some partners, some couples decide to have everything separate.

Some decide to merge everything and then others do a little bit of both. And from a high level, what, what do you see as the pros and cons to those approaches and functionally, like what, what does that potentially look like? And I’m, I’m specifically thinking about the group that maybe you said is the, is probably the largest group that has some merge and some separate.

How, how does that practically work?

Tim Baker: Yeah. So we divide these into three groups. We’ll, we’ll kind of go through the completely merged, the completely separate and then the hybrid. So I think if we look at the completely, the completely merged, I think some of the pros. For that group is simplicity and transparency, right? You know when one hand is washed on the other type of thing so you’re managing One a set of accounts to track expenses.

It makes budgeting and saving a lot easier Um, you know, I think full visibility can [00:23:00] foster Trust and reduce the chances of surprises Um, I think it’s easier to kind of align your financial goals. So it encourages more of a teamwork approach um You know, whether it’s a big goal or even something that’s, you know, less so, um, I think it promotes regular conversations.

Like, Hey, can you transfer that, you know, or can you, can you make sure that the money’s there? Because this bill is coming out, um, and it helps partners are on the same page. Um, I think it increases efficiency in, in money man, management. I know one of the things I was jealous about that you said, where you’re taking a lot of those like, um, uh, expenses that you always had, you know, we had to buy paper towels every three months or whatever.

And you’re like automating that with like, Amazon or whatever it is like in my house. So I couldn’t really do that because kind of shade takes care of that. So it’s kind of out of sight, out of mind for me. Right. Um, it could be with managing debt, you know, if you’re again, everything is, if you, if you have a shared credit card that, you know, kind of got out of whack, you’re seeing it, you know, together, um, and even investments again, most, most, [00:24:00] most of it, uh, retirement accounts are, are separate, but you know, you can, you can have joint investments.

Um, I think it helps streamline things like the redheaded stepchild of the financial plan estate planning. Um, that people often, you know, forget about if a partner becomes incapacitated, it’s easier to find stuff. Um, you know, and I think just easier during like life transition. So again, in the case of an emergency, um, a death, hopefully not, you know, the, the surviving partner has immediate access to all funds without any legal hurdles.

I think the cons here are, and I think this is probably the big thing is like loss of financial autonomy. So where, you know, like, hey, I was a grown up. I got my big boy job, big girl job. I’ve been kind of living on my own. And all of a sudden, um, Mary, I’m getting married and you want me to like combine everything like that.

It feels restrictive. I don’t I don’t like that. Um, I feel I feel controlled and that can lead to conflicts and spending habits and things like that. Um, [00:25:00] I think it could be potential for like power imbalances is like if one partner earns significantly more and everything is joint, they might feel entitled to have more control or, you know, the tiebreaker and that could create tension.

Um, the, the, I’ve definitely seen this where the lower earning partner might feel guilty about spending, so they don’t, they, they themselves don’t feel like they’re on the same level because. You know, they feel like that what they’re bringing to the table is not equitable. Um, could be conflicts over spending priorities.

So just, you know, the spender versus the saver can lead to frequent agreement, uh, agreements, disagreements where, you know, if you have kind of your separate playgrounds, your separate accounts that maybe that’s less so. Um, and then complications again, in case of divorce or separation, um, you know, Things, things like that, you know, and, and there’s probably a risk there too.

Like if one partner is less financially responsible, their actions can negatively impact both partners, credit scores and financial stability. So that’s

Tim Ulbrich: merged, right.

Tim Baker: Yeah, if they’re merged, so that would probably be the pros [00:26:00] and cons for the, for the merge. If they’re separate, the pros for it being separate is I think you maintain that financial independence that a lot of people kind of establish for a number of years, maybe before they get married.

Like you said, you and Jess were really young when you got married, right? I was, I was older. Um, you know, it’s simplifies, uh, personal spending. So I think like if you have hobbies or gifts, or I just want to spontaneously buy Shay a gift. I don’t want her to see that on a credit card statement.

I feel like this happens for us at like Christmas where I’m like, I’ll see something on Amazon, but she sees everything that we buy. So it’s like, there’s no surprise. So I’ll just say like, don’t look at the Amazon

Tim Ulbrich: to go take cash out. Although

Tim Baker: Yeah, yeah, exactly. Yeah. She’s like, why are you taking cash out? Like, you know, are you, you know, what are you buying?

Um, it could potentially. Yeah, yeah, exactly. Yeah, that’s those are few and far between. Um, it can reduce those power imbalances. So you’re avoiding situation where one feels partner, one, one partner feels dominant, um, easier in the case [00:27:00] of divorce or separation. Again, we don’t plan for that. Um, and again, potentially protects against financial mismanagement.

I know there we’ve had people that we’ve worked with shades as she has experienced this. I had to a degree where a partner Runs up a huge credit card bill. And if you’re on that account, like you’re on the hook. Um, so cons for completely separation is increased complexity with managing shared expenses, right?

So there’s more coordination when you’re, you’re split in household bills, who pays for what some people, and they can do this. In either scenario, but you have some people that will live off of one income and everything The other income is is is cream. It’s you know, so that doesn’t matter but like it could be there um, there could be potential secrecy and mistrust like You know, sometimes we get scared of something that we don’t understand or see.

So, you know, that, that could be there. I think it takes more of a lift to have alignment in financial goals. Um, it could be inequity and kind of the lifestyle contributions of like, how are [00:28:00] we, how are we doing this? Cause again, in this model, a lot of it is, um, completely separate. So like, if I’m just paying for the electric bill, but you’re paying for the mortgage, like, how does

Tim Ulbrich: do we work that out? Yeah.

Tim Baker: and more complicated in emergencies, that type of thing. So that would be the second, the second bucket. And then probably the most common that I see is kind of some merged, some separate. So the pro here is you kind of get the best of both worlds. You have, you have some financial independence with the benefits of shared financial management.

Um couples can maintain autonomy over personal spending while working together on joint goals So you kind of have you know the venn diagram so to speak you have you know And I think that again, I think for the most part the venn diagram that shared shaded area should be the Biggest and then you have like the outlier of kind of your own maybe accounts um simplified shared expenses Encourages healthy communication.

So couples still need to discuss and agree on contributions um Promotes transparency, but also allows you to [00:29:00] have, you know, a little bit of space Um reduce financial stress. I think the cons here is again. You still have that potential for financial imbalance Um, there’s still complexity in the money management if you’re again managing multiple accounts I think you still have a risk of you know, what’s yours versus ours and then how does that does that create?

A space or, uh, an arm’s length in your, in your marriage, um, and then I think less financial, you know, visibility and things like that. I think regardless of approach, no matter where you, and I, and I think more so than others, like it’s clear communication. Right. So sometimes you’re clearly communicating by default.

So if I have, everything’s like shake and see, she knows that I can, I just spend a hundred dollars on a bottle of Brown, right? And she’s like, dude, what, what the

Tim Ulbrich: She’s used to it by now.

Tim Baker: she’s used to it. So I think clear communication, regardless, I think regular check ins, you know, scheduling periodic financial discussions.

And again, sometimes that’s with the help of financial planner. I [00:30:00] also think that you doing that as a couple is really important. I think clear agreements and setting expectations of, of how things are going to be split or whatever that looks like can prevent conflicts. I kind of think of our partnership charter like, hey, if these things happen, this is what we’re going to do.

I think those are important. And then just being flexible. I think the, the key to any financial plan is not the, you know, nothing is poured in concrete. Right. We need to have flexibility because Things change. Life changes, right? And it is, you know, I’m sure the listeners have heard this, me say this, it’s about planning.

So that’s for you, Corey, planning with an I N G, not the plan, right? Like, cause the plan, once we have it, something happens in the world and you know, the plan goes out the door. So it’s about, it’s about the process of planning.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim communication, and we’re going to come back to talking about the value of a third party. I know it’s something Jess and I have benefited from Tremendously, um, and so we’ll talk about the role is but in terms of couples and [00:31:00] communication, you know, whether you’ve been married for 20 years whether you’re been together for 10 and you’re not married, whether you’re, you know, just started dating.

I think there’s a space for some of these conversations regardless of your situation. And we compile the list of 25 financial discussions for couples. If people want to download that guide, your financial pharmacist. com forward slash a 25. And I often joke with people like, Hey, this is a third party list, right?

So if you’re wanting to start some of these conversations, you know, it’s not, it’s not me coming with the ammo. It’s the, Hey, I read about this. I heard about this on a podcast. We should have these conversations, which, you know, jokingly, but I think that that speaks to some of the value, uh, of the third party.

Hey, give me a visual on the Venn diagram. Cause I do think for a lot of people. That resonates you talked about some merge some separate and in your opinion, you know You want to see that center part to be the the largest part knowing everyone’s situation is different So, you know that might be something like [00:32:00] 70 percent merge 15 15 60 20 20 right something along those lines, but there’s of course variations of that like it is Is all the money coming into the central and then we’re dividing the percentages or are we waiting it, you know, according to what we make.

So, you know, if we’re both contributing toward the mortgage payment, but one person makes 70 percent of the household income, you know, are we contributing equally? Or is it weighted any more details? You can share on that of what you’ve seen people do.

Tim Baker: . What I think is best is everything comes into a, a joint account. So like all of paychecks come into a joint account. And then I think if you do have like separate accounts, some dollar amount or some percentage of that can, you know, go to a, um, an individual account for you to do whatever you want with.

Right. I think what most people do, because again, I think it’s, it’s, you know, the, the inertia of this is here. It’s like, I think what most people do is they put, they [00:33:00] get paid in their normal accounts and then they feed into a joint account. That’s what Shay and I do. And I have always kind of complained about that.

And I think it got to a point, cause again, she’s experienced things in her own life that I think, you know, we are a team and I have no, but like, I think it’s just more of a comfort thing for her. Um, You know, but I don’t even know what the percentage, you know, essentially the way we do and we kind of follow with no budget budget and like we look at all of our expenses and basically she, she’s the tracker, you know, I’m the financial planner, but she actually does all this like so she has a spreadsheet that she says, okay, you know, Zoe’s now in daycare that’s costing us a million dollars a week.

Um, you know, we have this project coming up or whatever. And she basically says, this is how much money you need to put in every paycheck. Right. And then I always push the envelope with like, okay, what are we saving for, for vacations? What are we saving for retirement? Like that’s my role in all of this.

So she kind of does the. the kind of like what is it to run the household and then [00:34:00] we kind of talk about our goals or our major projects and I kind of shared with you how we kind of get up like get the Priority of things and then that’s what we essentially do, right? So that works for us again I think if it were up to me, I would be more of a hey into the joint and then maybe some money out to an individual The percentage is again very widely Um, but I think that for for us, it works because again, it allows me to kind of do some things that have interest that I know she would roll her eyes at.

And I’m just like, you know, she’s like, you know, kind of not absent from that. But I, I look at it as as long as we’re taking care of those. Shorten medium term goals in terms of how we operate the household. And then I know that, hey, we’re maxing out retirement, that’s not even hitting the paycheck, or we’re maxing out an HSA or an IRA, like as long as the, and, and we’re funding, you know, that trip that we’re going on next and we, we calculate that’s gonna be X amount of dollars.

Um, and typically what we just do is we just say, Hey, this is [00:35:00] what we’re paying on the, you know, spending on vacations. We divide that by 12 or or 24, we put that number in and then the, the following year we just kind of check in. We like. Hey, we had to like reach into our pocket a little bit more because mickey mouse is super expensive or or not typically for things like that We’re continuing to push the envelope in terms of what we are saving Um, so having those sinking funds, um, and sometimes we’ll have to you know, they’re not necessarily Um emergencies, but we’ll have maybe we’ll move some money around in our sinking funds that that makes sense So that’s kind of what we do.

I think a lot of um clients They do some version of that in, especially the hybrid clients where it’s mainly like we have separate accounts and we put X amount of dollars in and that’s how we spend our bills. But I think there’s, there’s levels to this in terms of like what’s comfortable. Again, like I feel like if I had my druthers, like I would just have everything joint kind of like you and Jess, but you know, again, it’s a, it’s a little bit different dynamic I think in terms of where we come, where we come from.

Tim Ulbrich: [00:36:00] Yeah. Yeah. And I want to make sure I recap to understand and so our audience can understand as well. So you guys have. Uh, paychecks coming to individual accounts, then you fund through Shea’s kind of monthly process and tracking. You fund the joint account. Um, Shea’s kind of boots on the ground month to month tracking.

What do we need to be doing short term? And then together you’re working on some of the prioritization of the goals. And then you’re pushing some of the conversation of, of the long term. Am I tracking? Okay, cool. And there’s something there that you said, I want to make sure we don’t brush by that is so important where I see a lot of stress and anxiety and frustration and arguments coming in is in the absence of understanding what those goals are long term, short term midterm, and whether or not we’re on track to achieve those.

That to me becomes a space where things get dynamic to say the least. Right. Because, you know, when you talk about like, Hey, we’re, we’re going to see Mickey mouse and we’re, we’re [00:37:00] planning for a, B or C and we’ve got a bucket and it’s the Mickey mouse bucket and we’re planning for it or longer term things like retirement or, and days gone by, you guys were buying the RV, right?

Whatever are those shared goals, if you know what they are and whether or not you’re on track or a progress for them, to me, that just alleviates so much. Of the financial stress and pressure that can come, uh, it’s in the absence of knowing that where I think that uncertainty causes the anxiety and the feelings of, of overwhelmed.

That can be the divide to getting on the same page.

Tim Baker: Yeah, like I always joke around that You know Shea is definitely more of and again, like I think culturally like the idea of saving for retirement is very foreigner because in brazil You kind of just work and then you have a pension like it’s very different. So Like trying to get her on board with that has been harder.

And again, she looks at our young family and she knows that the time is now to really, um, [00:38:00] enjoy them and, and, and the experiences. And, you know, I, I keep joking around with her because I’m like, one day, you’re going to get to a certain age where you can start to see retirement. And you’re going to say, Oh, like Tim, you’re so wise.

For, you know, basically, you know, getting me to put, you know, max out my 401k or

Tim Ulbrich: Words that will not come out of Shea’s

Tim Baker: it will never come out of her mouth, but she will eventually wake up one day and might think that, you know, so, um, so, but I, but I take solace in the fact that, again, knowing the plan and knowing, like, Most people you ask, like, are you on track for retirement?

They’re like, I don’t know. Like I, there’s a calculator when I sign into my 401k that tells me, which I, which I think is very like irresponsible if I can throw that out there because like. You know, Shay, like going through, I’m sharing all the, like the emotional conversations that, but like Zoe, our youngest is 10 months old and she just started going to daycare.

We [00:39:00] had a, um, a live in nanny, an au pair. And if you finally got to the point where we did this, this didn’t work out. So we’ve gone through this emotional thing of like transitioning Zoe to the. Um, to daycare, and that invites an extra expense and, um, sickness and all the, all this stuff, right? And, um, and the emotional sides of that, and, you know, Shay will exasperate it through this process.

Like, oh, I wish I could just stay home and, like, just be with my baby. And I’m like, well, you can. It just means that we have to, like, make changes. Like, we have to tighten the belt a lot. And, um, It’s the same thing with retirement. Like, like you can, a lot of us, if we’re living off of beans and rice and our living expenses are low, like you can retire.

Right. It’s just maybe not a like the lifestyle that you are. But I think like, I know that we are like, I know being more of the longterm planner, like that we’re doing well. Right. And that’s not to say it’s always going to [00:40:00] be like that because things come in cycles and, you know, jobs changes and things like that.

But where we’re at and what we’re doing. Yeah. Yeah. I feel really comfortable. And to be honest, like the rest of it, it really doesn’t matter where it goes. Like we want to, we have the same values that we want to spend it on our family or right now it’s on our house. Um, so like I don’t, I don’t think twice about that because I really, I trust in the plan.

You know, I trust the process to, um, take that adage. And if I didn’t though. You know, it’s the same thing we talk about like student loans or retirement plan and like, unless you have the math, like you have, you have emotions related to money, but unless you have the math to confirm or deny that you’re kind of flying blind.

Right? So like, I have the math and I know that what we’re doing is, is going to set us up for the future. So I don’t care if we spend money, even though that’s not necessarily my money personality. I don’t care if we spend money today. Um, yeah. So I think, [00:41:00] again, it goes back to having a plan and plan in because things consistently change.

And if you don’t have that, and I think again, a lot of, of tension and, and disagreement and, you know, and I, and I think having, I think having these discussions one on one, but I think having them with an objective third party that knows your balance sheet and knows your goals is very, very powerful. And sometimes.

I can, I can say something to Shay, like, why are you like this? Or why do you think this way? Um, and I’m asking the wrong accusatory question or says somebody that is a professional can, and, you know, they can ask some more neutral sounding questions to kind of get to. How does she think about money versus how do I think about money in a non judgmental way?

And again, that goes back to like, a lot of us don’t have the vocabulary or know what questions to ask because we just, we’re not raised like that and we just don’t, don’t know.

Tim Ulbrich: Let’s talk more about that in the value of a third part. I think we’re dancing around it, [00:42:00] but you’re getting, you’re giving a really good example. Um, you know, when we talk about something like nest egg and retirement and I, and if Jess were here, I think she would say as much that for her, like there’s the numbers in the Excel sheet and then there’s the reality of the feelings.

Right. And when retirement is a question mark is an unknown is a, I never think there’s going to be enough. That very much informs how we feel today and how we act, whether or not that’s based on reality. And so I think this is one example where having a third party involved can not only take us jointly through an exercise.

You know, versus me punching in numbers and saying, Hey, look at the sheet. Look at the sheet, look at the sheet. Like let’s walk through this together and challenge the assumptions, but then also include the emotional piece of, Hey, like I recognize that this says we’re on track and perhaps we’re even over saving, which is a conversation we’ve talked about before on the show.

All the while we’re feeling the pressure [00:43:00] today of, Hey, I wish there was some more cash around to experience the things that we want to experience with the boys, well, maybe there could be. Right. Because of what we’re, we’re doing for the future. So to me, that’s just one, one example. And if you want to pay back off that, or otherwise where you’ve seen having a third party, of course, we’re biased in what we do in the planning where it can be so valuable and helping partners work together.

Tim Baker: Yeah, we just signed on a new client recently that, you know, she’s podcast forever and, you

Tim Ulbrich: Shout out.

Tim Baker: Yeah, much, much love for the support. And the big reason that she came, she finally booked an appointment with us was because she just recently found out that her grandparents are gonna be leaving a pretty sizable amount of money to, um, her parents.

And she’s kind of, and she’s, she’s kind of taking advice from like the family. It’s like, save, save, save, like max out your retirement. And they’re feeling the tightness in like the, the day to day of having young kids and a [00:44:00] family and things like that. And she’s like, for what? Like, so that I can pass on millions or hundreds of thousands of dollars to like, what’s the, like, why?

Like, I don’t want to repeat that. Like I want. That balance of I want to live a wealthy life today And she kind of called you out of like that’s kind of what you say live a wealthy life today a wealthy life tomorrow Um, like there’s balance there. So if you’re always just living a wealthy life tomorrow, what’s the freaking point?

Right? What’s the point of? Of taking on this debt or earning this income or or or having a family like you want to make sure that That you know, you got one crack at this and I think for her it was like i’m i’m maxing everything else out and if I told Like if if I if I were to whisper like i’m not going to do this anymore like her family would think she’s crazy I’m like, well, they don’t know you, right?

They don’t know like the, like, it’s just like, oh, like, you know, I should pay off my student loans as quick as possible, or I should invest like this. It’s kind of that water cooler. I should, I should, you know, I should get, I should [00:45:00] claim Social Security this way, like that water cooler, like that. They don’t know your balance sheet.

They don’t know your goals. They’re trying to help you as best they can, but like, that’s not advice. So, and we’ve had clients that have done those things that I’m like, well, maybe we don’t need to do that anymore or right now, right? Maybe when we, when we build a plan, we see that there’s room there for you to take care of Tim and Jess in 2025 and maybe not so much Tim and Jess in 2065.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: And that’s okay, right? Um, but I think, I think sometimes having these conversations, whether they’re the discovery meetings to see if, if like we’re a good fit for, from a, from a planner to a client perspective, or when I used to do what the planning team does a lot better than what I did, like the scripter plan meetings, where there’s a lot of emotion there in both of those meetings, probably more so in the scripter plan where we’re talking about, you know, asking very pointed questions about like, like what are, what are the things that matter to you most?

And I remember those. [00:46:00] Meetings, there was tears, there was kind of the, the one partner like crane in their neck at their other partner, because they’re saying something, they had no idea that they felt, or it was a passion of theirs. Um, and I think that goes back to just not having the vocabulary or sometimes I always talk, I always tell the story of when I got out of the army, I was working in a where I was working.

Uh, I worked for Sears Kmart. They had just merged. We’re like, we’re going to buy for retail supremacy. And I was like, yeah, exactly. I was like, yeah, we’re going to beat Amazon and Walmart and all that. So it’s hilarious now, but I had a great interview with them and it was kind of more operational leadership than what I was experiencing in the army.

And, um, and it was, it was long hours. So I would, I would get up, I would leave my house at five o’clock and I would get there at five 30. Um, and then I would stay until probably six, six 30 drive the 30 minutes home and it was dark both ways, but I don’t ever remember most days. I don’t ever remember the [00:47:00] drive.

It was just like I was on autopilot when I got into my car and then when I, you know, basically part and I think a lot of the times that’s our life because we get so freaking busy, Tim, that we don’t slow down and actually like. Like reflect or ask ourselves these questions and again that goes back if we go back to like the third party And again, i’m biased Like if we’re meeting with you regularly, even if it’s just annually or semi annually Um, obviously we do a lot of work on the front end of a plan But even if we’re just taking the time twice a year To kind of check in and actually view that dashboard and not just stare out the windshield for 30 minutes, you know, on your commute to and from, I think that that action, um, and doing that with a partner to kind of tie it back to Valentine’s day is really, really powerful.

And I think just because of the hustle and bustle and the distractions that we have, um, with technology or whatever else, it’s hard for [00:48:00] us to kind of slow down and say, like, is this really what I want? Shay, is this really what you want? And I think like, you know, one of the things that Shay and I like to do when, so we do like a monthly date night, and then we kind of do ad hoc stuff, but like, we’ll talk about, it’s more of like dreams.

Like, like what, where do we want to go next? Right? So one of the exercises that we’ve done is, you know, we’ll put, I’ll make a list of all like the projects or things that I want to do. So whether it’s buy an RV or redo the kitchen or you know, redo our backyard. So we kind of have this list. And we both basically rank order the list in order, you know, basically what we want the most.

And then I basically combined that in a weighted, a weighted ranking. And then we talk about that and that’s kind

Tim Ulbrich: come up with a shared list first or do you have your own list? And then,

Tim Baker: we come up with a shared list that we’re both basically ranking. And then what’s come, what, what, some of the things that have come out of that. Where, you know, one of the things since we moved [00:49:00] into our house in 2020, she’s like, I hate this chandelier in the, in the front of the house.

And, and I’m just, and I, I could not care less about it, Tim. I, it’s not something that I even noticed, but she’s like, I hate it. It’s like this crystal thing. It’s gets dusty and cobwebby. Like, I don’t like

Tim Ulbrich: get it done and

Tim Baker: And I’m like, well, what is it, what would it cost us just to kind of get a new fixture and replace?

She’s like 1500 bucks. I’m like, why are we even wasting any more? And that, that’s probably not the way, the right way to ask it. Cause that sounds accusatory, but I’m like, what, well, what can we do just to make this go away, like, you know, so, so those kind of get knocked off, but then some of the major projects, like, Hey, we’re redoing our backyard.

Like we both put that at the top of the, uh, top of the list. And like, that’s what we’re attacking next. Right. So then the next one, you know, we’ll attack next, or we maybe we’ll, we’ll do the, the, the ranking again. But I think like, those are more of like the exciting, like nobody wants to talk about, well, some people do, but like.

Like paying off debt is like, nah, like it can kind of be a drag. Um, or some of these other more mundane parts of the financial plan. I [00:50:00] think, you know, aligning things that, and for us it’s like, you know, having a green space that we really want and is invited in that, you know, we see our family, you know, just enjoying was really important.

And we’re not going to move because of, you know, where the market is, the interest rates, like we’re going to put the money in the house that we have. And I think we’re excited about that. So like, those are some of the discussions that we have. And I think, you know, what you do is then you then plug that into a financial planner, um, and you say, okay, like, how can we make this happen?

Where are we, where are we pulling this money from? How long is it going to take for us to save? Do we use debt? Do we leverage, what does that look like? So.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, one thing you said that is so important and Jess and I experienced this working with you and the rest of the planning team. You said, is this what we want? And a question that we have to come back to. And one of the things I love about our process, you know, step one, as we get organized, we really can’t do anything else until we have a good record and system of, you know, where’s everything at?

What’s the balance sheet? And do we have eyes on everything [00:51:00] that’s out there? Step two, how What’s the vision? We call it script your plan and, and once we set that vision, which I will go on record by saying, most financial planning firms and financial planners are making financial decisions without a vision.

And that is backwards. The

Tim Baker: even without like a balance sheet, 

Tim Ulbrich: without a balance sheet.

Tim Baker: you have a pulse. Let me sell you this insurance product that you don’t need. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And the vision, I always describe it, the vision should be the window in which you’re looking through. And the other side is any financial decision you’re making, how are we gonna handle, you know, the debt? What are we looking at in terms of investing and saying for the future?

Should we buy this investment property? What about this vacation? What about that? Right. And that shared vision, which you talked about is so important in terms of two people working together. But once we set that vision, you know, this is not the strategic plan at your workplace where it sits on the shelf and becomes dusty.

Like this comes back in the meetings to say, Hey, Tim and Jess in 2023 or whatever it was last time we did this, you guys said that tangibly, these were [00:52:00] the things that meant. You were living your rich life with your family. Have we done them? Have

Tim Baker: Yeah. You hold the mirror up, right?

Tim Ulbrich: hold the mirror up. And when we think about how we measure the ROI, right?

Of the financial plan. I know, I know a topic you’re passionate about. Sure. There are X’s and O’s that we want to look at. We’re spending so much investing of time and money working with the financial planner and what’s the potential return on that if we didn’t have that relationship. Yes. Let’s have that conversation, but what is it worth?

To say, this is the vision for rich life. And we’re actually going to make this happen and tracking whether or not we’re achieving that. Like we all know when we look back in 30 or 40 years, that is going to be what matters, not did we get our nest egg to 3. 9 versus 3. 6 million. So that vision and having someone that can facilitate the conversations to get to that vision, and then to hold that mirror back up and say, how are we doing?

Right. How are we progressing?

Tim Baker: and, and, and I think it could be a little bit of tough love, you know, a little bit of the [00:53:00] stick of like, Hey, you know, and if I’m talking to myself here, it’s like, Hey, Tim, like nowhere in your script, your plan meeting, your goal session, did you say that you had to lead the league in like bourbon purchases?

If that’s important, then like that should be in the financial planning and we should, we should, you know, we should account for that. But if it’s not, then like, what are we doing? You know, I know people can relate to like shop therapy and things like that. You know, that some of the things that goes on there, but like most of the time people are like, Oh, I have to have like, I don’t have to have these things, but that’s what we typically spend is empty calories.

That’s what we spend our. Our dollars on. It’s more of the and I’ll, I’ll shout out one of our clients. It’s been working with us probably since 2018. Um, I talked to each other yesterday. Like one of the big things to, to major things, um, that we’ve worked on so she good amount of credit card debt. Large amounts of student loans didn’t necessarily love her her job when she was working with us initially.

Um, You know, she w what was uncovered in her script or plan when [00:54:00] she had this passion for horseback riding

Tim Ulbrich: mm

Tim Baker: you have to do this. Like, this is obviously a passion. When you talk about it, you, you’re glowing. And she’s like, oh, but like credit card debt and I have to work more. And, and my student loans and you know, you, you fast forward today, you know, she has, the loans are forgiven.

She’s left that hospital system. She’s working in industry now. She loves their job, a flexibility, better money. Um credit cards are gone She has pickles the horse She she moved from one part of florida to another to be closer to like the national questioning center So like so like that was the big and then that was the big things and then when I talked to her yesterday And you know, her, her other big thing was she wanted to do an African safari with her mom when she booked September, early September, right?

She’s doing it. And she was one of these people where I was talking about like seven figure pharmacist. She’s like, yeah, right, Tim. Like that, that’s, that’s made up, but we looked at her portfolio again. This is not [00:55:00] indicative of like future performance, but her IRAs that were managing grew a hundred thousand dollars year over year.

And she’s like, Oh. Okay. Like I’m now I’m starting to get it, but like super pumped up about like these trips and like the passion and things like that. So like we talk about ROI, like we can see her net worth and her investments growing. Like that’s, that’s, that’s. That’s happened. But if you were to say like, what are maybe some of the things that are better about the life plan that we’ve built out, that’s financial, that’s supported by the financial plan or these passions of like this once in a lifetime trip, the fact that she’s, you know, making it happen with her, you know, with, with showing horseback riding and things like that.

So, and, and again, like, I think this. Can be harder with two, like, with two people to go back to the couples. Right. And you know, I think the way that Shay, I Shay and I do it in terms of rank ordering and, and, and talking through things like that. I think the help of a financial planner goes a long, long way because there’s different dynamics in [00:56:00] different couples.

You know, there’s some people that are a bulldozer, some people that you know, are more timid. And I think bringing. To light both both partners contributions and viewpoints and what their passion are is that’s, that’s what’s going to like save the financial planning profession from the robots, it’s those types of engagements and that type of care and about about our clients and what we’re doing.

It’s not. Some of these other things, right? Like, like invest in or whatever, those things are going to eventually be, you know, everything’s going to be by robots. But, um, I think it’s important again, it’s, it’s really hard to do this by yourself. It’s even harder to do it, you know, with a partner that has a different, you know, value structure.

And I think making sure that you’re rowing that. Boat in the same direction is, is vital. Or you, you know, you get, it’s passive aggressive or, you know, you, you bury, you bury things down deep and, um, you know, you, you hold onto them and [00:57:00] it’s not productive either.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, perhaps obvious, but I’d like to wrap up here. And I think it needs to be said, knowing that many of our listeners might be the nerd and their relationship, right? Um, and if one person is taking the lead and if that’s you, which is very common that you might have one person kind of take the lead, it’s critical that the other person, the other party is informed, right?

Delegation does not equal uninformed. And I think this is where something like a third party, Um, can be a really valuable asset. This is where making sure you have periodic meetings. You talked about that earlier in the show, making sure you’ve got good systems and documents like legacy folders. We’ve talked about that on the show before.

And it reminds me back to an episode four years ago, we’ll link it, link to this episode in the show notes. One, I often referenced back to with Michelle Cooper, who wrote a book. I’ve still got me a widow’s journey to love happiness and financial independence. And during the show, she shared her personal story.

Of after losing her husband [00:58:00] to suicide and realizing shortly after his death that despite herself being an attorney And working in the financial industry for years She was out of the loop of their family finances and was left to navigate everything while also grieving the loss of her husband And you know again if one person’s taking the lead and that function works great.

But what are the systems? What’s the third party solution? What are the conversations that need to be happening to make sure that both people are are informed in that process?

Tim Baker: yeah. So important, Tim, and, and like I said, you know, I think, I think the best results are when you have two engaged parties most of the time. Um, that more or less take, take our advice. I mean, we do use tools that. Can keep maybe an absent partner or a spotty partner up to speed whether that’s emails or Recap emails or things like that, but I think the goal here just ultimately You know when you’re working as a couple on your money You want to the goal is to win most of the time and I think you know You’re never gonna be perfect.

Some people, you know, will will have bad [00:59:00] months or make bad decisions and and they feel despondent but you know, I think I think it’s really exciting and, and can be very relieving, you know, especially when you have the plan in place to know like, Hey, we’re okay. So we can maybe do things that are outside of the comfort zone, whether it’s saving or spending.

Um, whatever spectrum you fall on. And again, obviously we’re super biased because we believe in what we do. And we’ve seen, you know, great results from a lot of our clients. Um, but you know, it’s something that again, we just don’t do well because we, it’s not something we have the vocabulary for. So I love, I appreciate the topic.

Um, and, and like, like we mentioned at the top, like it’s not a one size fit all like, like there, there’s a lot of ways to kind of a tackle the financial plan and how your, your finances are set up. And I think it’s trying to, it’s the same thing with the budget, trying to find what works best for you. Um, and running with that and then kind of iterating [01:00:00] and making sure that, you know, you feel that all parties are kind of represented and feel good about it.

Tim Ulbrich: Let me end him by putting a plugin for our services. Cause I think our team just does this incredibly well. Shout out to our team of certified financial planners. If you’re listening, thinking, Hey, I’d like to learn more about what it would look like in working. With one of YFP’s fee only certified financial planners, whether you’re single, engaged, married, partner, we’d love to have that conversation.

You go to yourfinancialpharmacist. com. You’ll see an option there to book a discovery call. Uh, Tim leads those discovery calls, opportunity for us to learn more about your situation, uh, learn more about our services and ultimately determine, You know, whether or not there’s a good fit there, we’d like love to have that conversation.

And I think that, you know, we look at our process and our system, as I talked about briefly in terms of making sure we have everything organized, scripting that plan, setting the vision. Uh, we, we just do this effectively. And I think that not only are we trying to move the net worth forward, that’s an important part, but we’re also looking at, you know, beyond the numbers, what does it look like to be living a [01:01:00] rich life and how do we get clear on that?

And how do we develop a financial plan that could support. Living that rich life. So Tim really, really enjoyed the conversation and, uh, we’ll, we’ll catch everyone back here next week. Take care. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 394: Crafting a Rich Life in Retirement: Insights from David Zgarrick, PhD


Tim Ulbrich, YFP Co-Founder welcomes back David Zgarrick, PhD to share his journey into “preferment,” balancing retirement, financial planning, and staying engaged through teaching and consulting.

Episode Summary

In this episode, Tim Ulbrich welcomes back David Zgarrick, PhD, as he shares his journey into what he calls the “preferment phase” of life. Dr. Zgarrick opens up about his transition from academia to retirement, the joy of new routines, and the power of early financial planning. He highlights the importance of staying engaged—through consulting, teaching, and meaningful activities—while keeping financial health in check.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:00] Welcome Back, Dr. Zgarrick!
  • [00:10] The Preferment Phase Explained
  • [01:56] Living the Rich Life Today and Tomorrow
  • [05:11] The Importance of Early Financial Planning
  • [07:48] Navigating Retirement and Financial Management
  • [10:58] The Value of Community and Personal Fulfillment
  • [14:38] Staying Engaged Through Consulting
  • [38:33] Advice for Different Career Stages
  • [44:42] Final Thoughts and Wisdom

Episode Highlights

“ Dave, take a deep breath. You’re not going to run out of money. And here’s why you’re  not going to run out of money because you  never ran out of money before and you’re not, you know, unless you turn into some different person who starts spending money in a different way, you’re not going to run out of money.” – David Zgarrick [8:37]

“ One of the conversations that my  advisor has been having with us is reminding us it’s okay to spend a little bit more money. It’s okay to, you know, go on that trip or do those things.” – David Zgarrick [9:49]

“ So long as I feel that sense of value I choose to engage myself. And, you know, on the other hand, there are places where  I no longer feel that sense of value  and I have made conscientious efforts to step away from those things.” – David Zgarrick [20:37]

“ Maybe one of the aspects of the transition that has been more challenging is, is  feeling like you are part of something  that is important or has a higher purpose.”  – David Zgarrick [21:55]

“ I’ve come to realize that’s okay,  because the people that I do have influence  with, and the people that I am, shall we say, involved with, is a smaller group of people, but in some ways we have deeper and more meaningful types of relationships.” – David Zgarrick [23:44]

“ Nothing is  forever. And you do want to  make sure that you are taking the time to spend time with people who are important to you and to do the things that are important to you.”-  David Zgarrick [43:37]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, welcome back to the show.

David Zgarrick: Thank you, Tim. Good to see you.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, we had you on almost two years ago to the date, and that was episode 291. We’ll link to that one in the show notes. And one thing that stood out from that interview for me, David, that I have shared with many other people was your mention of shifting, not to retirement, but a quote, preferment phase after over 30 years in academia, quickly recap for us, what, what you mean by that, the preferment phase, and maybe what’s that looked like now, two years later.

David Zgarrick: perform it. And just to kindly borrow a phrase that many of, you know, Lucinda Maine. She was the executive VP at American Association of colleges and pharmacy. And I served on their board of directors for a number of [00:01:00] years, got to know, listen to many other folks at very well.

We send it. I were kind of on the. Same timeline in terms of making this shift. And she, and I know she, she heard this term from another fellow CEO of another professional association in DC same timeline that she did is there’s the sense that, you know, when it’s time to change paths, so to speak, it wasn’t that I was retiring, you’re totally stepping away and, you know.

Sitting back and not doing much of anything. It was the sense that I’m going to, um, I am going to in some ways step away, but I’m going to also remain engaged in doing things, particularly things that I really like to do and I value doing, and that was that sense of that’s where preferment came from. I’m, I’m doing things that I really prefer to do both for myself as well as things within our profession.

Um, And at the same time, um, you know, [00:02:00] not having the same schedules and the same demands that we did when we were, you know, working as part of other organizations.

Tim Ulbrich: When you say Dave doing the things that I really like to do and value to do, you know, we talk often on the show about the importance of yes, the X’s and O’s financially, but also finding that way that we can live the rich life today and tomorrow. And, and I think we’re saying the same thing in a different way.

What are those things? So when you think about the performance phase, we were talking about skiing before we hopped on the show, but what, what are those things that you’re, that light you up?

David Zgarrick: Well, you know, in some ways, you know, they start with the real basics that I think a lot of us have the routines, maybe that many of us enjoy. You know, it’s interesting as I’ve moved into this. Phase mornings, you know, your your regular everyday working phase mornings can be a very hectic busy time for many families and many people because you’re obviously getting ready to get up and go to work and all that kind of stuff.

In this phase right now mornings are actually [00:03:00] one of my favorite times a day because it’s I, I You know, it’s probably fair to say I ease into my mornings. I have never considered myself a morning person. I’m not one of those people that, you know, jumps up and goes on a 10 mile run and then goes off to work or something like that.

That was not me. Um, I get up, I. Do my Sudoku. I do several of the New York Times puzzles that, you know, the word, all the connections that that kind of stuff. Um, I have a cup of coffee. I eat my breakfast. I think about what I’m going to do. Um, you know, one of the things that preferment has meant for me is taking better care of myself.

Um, and so things like, um, am I going to go to the gym and do a workout? Yeah, I do. The weather’s nice. Am I going to go up for a nice bike ride? You know, those types of things. If it’s a ski day, am I, you know, yeah, I’ll get up and get ready to put my stuff in the car and head off to the mountain and go skiing and all that kind of stuff, [00:04:00] even though so those things I do in the mornings are not nearly as rushed.

They’re just. Basically doing the things that that means something to me in our value to me and, and, and, and, and fit well with, with what I want to do. So, so from a, from a very personal sense, you know, that’s, that’s a lot of what performant is, is meant to me.

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, what I love about that is I think sometimes when we think about retirement or what we’re calling here a preferment phase, we have these grandiose vision of these big things, these big experiences, which there is a time and place for

David Zgarrick: Yeah. Oh, yeah. Very much

Tim Ulbrich: But often, I, I think it’s what you’re talking about.

It’s, it’s the flexibility of the day and kind of how you spend your time. And, you know, you talk about investing more in yourself and kind of the pace of the morning. Like these are the things that when we talk about living a rich life, you know, that really resonates with me. Like, and by the way, like [00:05:00] those aren’t crazy expensive things.

Um,

David Zgarrick: no. Exactly. Exactly. No, no. It’s, you know, doing my Sudoku and the New York Times crossword and a wordle and those kind of stuff. Those are those are pretty inexpensive things to do, uh, you know, going down to the gym to work out. Yeah. I pay a little bit for a gym membership, but in the big scheme of things, that’s, that’s not a terribly high expense.

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, one of the things in our previous conversation that really stood out to me was your mention of how important the early planning was, the, the foundation bricks that you laid early in your career that allowed you to get to a point of financial security, allowed you to get to a point of having the option, right, having this phase that we’re talking about now that you’ve been in this season for a bit of time, how has that planning impacted?

Day to day. Right. We talk so much about the accumulation and getting to this point. We don’t talk as much about, well, what actually happens [00:06:00] when you retire 

David Zgarrick: Those are great points because obviously you’re still planning. You’re still utilizing financial management and financial management skills. It’s it’s not like you get to the end of the road. It’s like, okay, I’ve got all my money and now I don’t have to do anything to worry about. You know, you still have to be engaged in in plan.

Um, you know, now probably more, you know, let’s just say this. I’ve always been engaged. Um, not just in saving money. I mean, I re I was reflecting on it. It wasn’t in our previous conversation, but I think you had posted this once. It’s like, you know, what’s, what’s your favorite fun way to spend money? You know, does every, everyone has a fun thing they like to spend money on and everything.

And I, I kind of answered that in a kind of a smarty pants way. But it’s like my, my favorite thing to do was actually save money. It made me feel good when I actually had some extra money that I knew that I could. And, and that was, um, you know, that sense of it’s going to give me options [00:07:00] down the road, you know, you know, whether it be maybe going on some fun vacation or something like that, or buying something that’s important to me, or, you know, being able to move into performance earlier than I probably had planned on doing.

And, um, you know, you know, having done that. You know, save that money really gave me those options, you know, spending money. Of course, you know, spending money is part of life. We all spend money and managing those skills, you know, the way you keep tracking your funds and the kinds of things you spend money on are things that I still pay attention to.

I still use Quicken, you know, all the time to basically track my expenses and, and keep tabs on what’s going on. Um, You know, I, I think it’s, it’s good to really remain engaged in that. I, you know, what, what I had a conversation with my financial advisor a few weeks ago, as we were going through, [00:08:00] you know, as we do most of the time, he goes to the Monte Carlo simulations of.

You know, how long is your money going to last under various situations and that kind of stuff. And, you know, his experience has been, you know, what, one of the things that most people who, especially people who retire relatively early, they, they do get somewhat, I don’t know if paranoid is the right word, but they’re, they’re concerned or somewhat overly concerned about running out of money.

Everyone thinks, Oh my God, I gotta be really, really careful. I’m going to run out of money. And my financial advisor basically told me, sit back, Dave, take a deep breath. You’re not going to run out of money. And here’s why you’re not going to run out of money because you never ran out of money before and you’re not, you know, unless you turn into some different person who starts spending money in a different way, you’re not going to run out of money.

I mean, yeah, maybe the markets go up and down. Maybe, maybe your resources become different. [00:09:00] You know what, you know what we all do in situations like that. We adjust, you know, um, you know, you know, one of the good things, I guess, about our lives. I mean, both myself and my wife were both pharmacists. So we were fortunate to have a fair amount of resources to be able to work with.

And when those resources are working with us, we’re. Enables us to do some really nice things, and that’s great. If, for whatever reason, those resources were not available to us, you know, we have a fair amount of, let’s say, discretionary in there, and we can certainly cut back on those discretionaries if we had to, and focus on, you know, what are the real absolute needs.

And, um, like I said, you know, I’m not really worried if anything, one of the. Conversations that my advisor has been having with us is reminding us it’s okay to spend a little bit more money. It’s okay to, you know, go on that trip or do those things. [00:10:00] Or, you know, our big thing this last year was buying a generator.

There’s an exciting way to spend. 20, 000, but you know, it’s, it’s actually something that was important. Um, especially given our, our move that we made over this past year, uh, moving from Colorado to Maine.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And, and I’m glad you’re mentioning this, this behavior of learning how to spend on some level. Well, at the same time, like Dave’s not going to become a different person that got him to this point. Right. And I think that’s important that we objectively look at the facts, not only in the Monte Carlo simulation, but also in like, how have you gotten to this point?

David Zgarrick: Exactly, exactly. I, I got to this point because yeah, I, I, you know, saved money and I was judicious of how we spent it and, and I, I remained that way, you know, those things have not changed because I’ve moved into the performance stage. [00:11:00] Mm

Tim Ulbrich: about that because we had a really good brief conversation before we recorded about, you know, yes, it’s the X’s and O’s when we talk about retirement, but it’s also about. You know, community for many people and everyone’s plan is a little bit different.

And for some, you know, it’s, Hey, let’s get to the warm, warm weather and be a snowbird and that’s a good fit. Others, you know, we were joking. It’s, Hey, let’s get in the RV and travel and see the country. That’s a good fit. But for many other people, it’s, Hey, what, what is the sense of community and why is that important to us?

And I think your move to Colorado and then your move back to the Northeast is a really good example of that.

David Zgarrick: That’s that’s a great example of that. You know, I’ll go back in time, you know, two, three years, um, when we first started thinking about, you know, going down this path and my wife and I were having conversations about where did we want to be? It’s funny, you know, we lived in Boston for a number of years and, Had originally thought, yeah, we’re probably gonna end up in Maine somewhere in retirement and all that kind of stuff.

And we were out driving around one day and my wife was like, well, [00:12:00] why don’t we check out? Colorado is in Denver is placed to retire. And it’s like, I love to ski. That would be great. And we did. And so we made the move out to Colorado and, um. Let’s say, obviously, there are a lot of positives from about Colorado, especially from a skiing standpoint and being out in nature and all kinds of things, but but there were things that we really missed, too.

And I think that sense, you know, having been in particularly the Northeast for as long as we had, you know, there were there were a lot of things that we missed about the Northeast and and. You know, again, I consider ourselves very fortunate in that we, you know, we made this decision to move out to Colorado and then a couple of years later, we made a decision decision to move back and I’m glad that we did, that we, you know, didn’t feel locked into our original choice.

You know, we are happy, very happy to be back [00:13:00] to the Northeast. Um, we do have, you know, you know, community here, you know, between folks we knew in Boston and folks we knew in other parts of the mid Northeast. Um, we, we’ve had, you know, people come and visit us here. I mean, I, I was joking, you know, we, we had more people probably visit us in our first two months in Maine than we did in our two years in Colorado.

And, um, And, and so it was, it was just nice to be able to host people here. We did something here when we moved to Maine that we had not done. And my wife and I’s essentially 35 years of being together. And that was actually build a house. You know, the house that we are here in Maine is we, we worked with a builder and essentially designed and built something, you know, literally from the ground up, um, it was.

Kind of good. I feel very happy that we waited that long, you know, to do that. I know a lot of people build new houses fairly early on and that kind of [00:14:00] stuff. And, you know, sometimes, you know, it, let’s just say it helps to know what you want as well as to know what you don’t want when, when you build a home.

And that’s probably a conversation for a whole nother episode of your, of your podcast to people that are thinking about building homes and, um, You know what, you know what goes into that process. And I’d love to be part of that if you never want to go down that road. Um, but, but, you know, yeah, we moved here back to the northeast and built a home.

It took about a year to get that home built. But, you know, we’ve been here since last May and are really, really happy to be back.

Tim Ulbrich: shift gears, Dave, and talk about your decision to stay engaged in consulting work while your financial plan doesn’t require it. You just talked about your conversation with your advisor. It’s going to be okay. You, you’ve made an intentional decision to stay engaged in doing consulting work. Tell us more about that decision.

Mm

David Zgarrick: I’ll say [00:15:00] what part of it goes back to what we were just talking about with community and we have various different types of community. I mean, you know, for many of us, it’s our friends and neighbors and people that we knew in the areas where we lived and that kind of stuff, you know, a community.

That’s very important to me is is the higher education community, particularly the pharmacy education community. It was a very. Mm hmm. Important part of my, of my being for, you know, essentially 35 years and, and there are, um, many folks within that community that I’m still very much connected to, um, and I, and I stay engaged with them.

And now, in some ways that staying engaged is through doing little bits of teaching. I still, um, you know, have colleagues at various, I think this last year, I, um. Taught anywhere between one in six courses at six different universities. So, [00:16:00] um, you know, and much of that online. Some of it. Some of it. I actually did go, you know, visit campuses and that’s that’s I can’t begin to tell you how much I appreciate that.

I like. The teaching in person as opposed to, you know, what so many of us have done over zoom and all that kind of stuff over the pandemic. So, so getting back into classrooms and physically meeting with students. Um, other, you know, a couple of universities I’ve been working as a, as a consulting, doing some faculty development work, doing some leadership development work.

Um, again, it keeps me engaged and involved. Um, yeah. You, we and our listeners know that, you know, there are challenges and very significant challenges in pharmacy and particularly pharmacy education right now. And, you know, what, one of the things I recognize as a consultant is I don’t have all of the answers.

I don’t have a magic wand. I’m not, you know, bringing me in as a consultant is not going to make your problems go away. Um, [00:17:00] But, um, but what I do bring is a perspective. You know, I bring a perspective by bringing experience. Um, I can help others who are dealing with issues similar to what I and other experienced leaders have dealt with over the course of our careers.

And we, we share a little bit about what we’ve learned. And at the end of the day, I, you know, I, you know, especially when you’re a consultant, I, you know, I recognize Transcribed What I am and what I’m not, and you know, what I’m not is a savior. I’m not, you know, somebody who comes in and solves all the problems.

What I do bring is a perspective. And at the end of the day, you know, I take a step back and say, ultimately, this is your problem to solve. It’s not my problem to solve. I’ll, I’ll provide you with this information and this feedback and this help, and at the end of the day, you’re, you’re, you’re, you on your end, they’re going to decide what you want to do.

And, and that’s, I guess that’s another nice thing about being in the performance [00:18:00] stage of life is I’ve gotten very good at saying that’s not my problem.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Yeah. Or here’s what I can do and I can’t do.

David Zgarrick: Here’s what I can do and here’s what I can’t do or won’t do. So, I mean, you know, one of the things from the teaching, I mean, I’ve made a conscious decision. I’ve had colleagues at other universities come to me and say, Hey, Dave, would you like to? Teach this course, you know, not just a lecture or two, but come in and teach an entire course.

And that’s something I’ve taken a step back from and say, no, I won’t do that. I don’t want to be in charge administratively of all of the aspects that are involved because because teaching a course is, as you well know, is so much more than just coming into a classroom and giving lectures

Tim Ulbrich: You’ve served your time there. You’ve done it. Ha ha ha.

David Zgarrick: Exactly. And, and that’s, yeah, no, that’s, that’s, that’s not an area that I, that I want to be involved in anymore. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And your story is such a good one, Dave, for me, uh, and it’s an inspiration to me when I, when [00:19:00] I think about retirement, um, I don’t foresee a point in time, you know, outside of, of health concerns or something that doesn’t allow me to work of not doing, you know, something, money aside, you know, I, I just value.

That feeling of being engaged, of contributing, and it’s a two way street, right? So when you’re consulting with universities, whether you’re teaching or, you know, consulting, uh, with the leadership teams, whatever you may be doing, of course, you’re providing your experience and offering value. But that’s a two way street back to you of, of that sense of feeling of, of contribution and, Hey, you built a career and have gained these experiences and skills and to be able to share those.

Yes, you’re going to get paid for it as a consultant, but I would argue there’s, there’s perhaps even a greater value that comes from a sense of contribution.

David Zgarrick: Yeah. No, I mean, it all comes down to, I mean, I, I have a pretty simple mantra these days. I mean, I, I want to do things that I value and I want Okay. [00:20:00] What I do to be valued by others. I mean, and there’s all kinds of ways to define value. I mean, you know, there’s, there’s what one gets paid, of course, but, you know, there’s other things that you and I both do that, you know, maybe the sense of value isn’t in what we.

Get paid for doing, but it’s in how we’re making that contribution. And is that contribution important to yourself? And is that contribution important to the others that, that you work with? And, um, you know, so long as I feel that sense of value, I, I choose to engage myself. And, and, you know, on the other hand, you know, there are places where I no longer.

Feel that sense of value and I have made conscientious efforts to step away from those things. Um, you know, I, I don’t, you know, again, it’s, it’s, it’s a, it’s very nice being at a [00:21:00] point in your life where you don’t feel you to do something.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Dave, I remember probably three months or so ago, you and I had had touch base. And one of the things you mentioned was how stark of a transition it was. To go into retirement where you’re no longer day in, day out, interacting with colleagues. Uh, and I know that shifted a little bit with the pandemic.

Maybe that was a, a, a, a little bit of an off ramp, you know, and, and reduced that. But tell us more about that. Was there anything else that really surprised you about the transition?

David Zgarrick: Well, I was gonna say, when I when I think about the transition, I mean, on one hand again, I think about mornings and working out and taking better care of myself and all those good things that I know that I’m doing a better job of now that I that I was doing before, um. Maybe one of the aspects of the transition that has been more challenging is, is feeling like you are [00:22:00] part of something that is important or has a higher purpose.

Um, you know, when we, most of us, when we work within our jobs or careers, we are working as part of organizations and there’s a reason we’re there. We want to be there. We want to contribute to, to something that we know is, is important. Bigger than ourselves, whether it be taking care of patients or, you know, educating students or, or doing the research that we’re involved in and that kind of stuff, we, we know that there’s that higher, bigger purpose to, to what it is that we’re doing.

And as, as you transition into retirement preferment, um, you know, you’re, you’re kind of stepping away from that. And, um, one of the things I, I had this realization a few months ago and, and. You know, we, we think about our spheres of influence and, you know, when I was, um, doing my work in higher education, you know, there’s a lot of value that’s put into how big [00:23:00] that sphere of influence is and, and how many people are you influencing?

What types of influence are you having on them, and that kind of stuff. Yeah, as I’ve, as I’ve made this transition, one, one thing you, you have to realize is, you know, for the vast majority of us, our, our spheres of influence are, if anything, becoming smaller as, as we step away, as we make that transition, I’m no longer, you know, in a position to, you know, influence as many people or, you know, make as many decisions that, that I had, um, previously, um, Um, And I’ve come to realize that’s okay, because the people that I do have influence with, and the people that I am, shall we say, involved with, is a smaller group of people, but in some ways we have deeper and more meaningful types of relationships, you know, the people that come and visit us here in Maine, the people that I go and visit [00:24:00] In, in other places and that kind of stuff, they’re, they’re the people that we have really made conscientious decisions about staying engaged and involved with, and I’m, I’m not going to name names here.

I mean, those people know who they are and I know who they are and we, you know, make very much, um, Decisions to to be part of each other’s lives. And I and I can’t begin to tell you how much I value those relationships. And I and I get the sense that those people value me. That’s that’s why they’re they choose to have me involved in their their circles as well.

And, um, again, I, you know, as we I’m now I I judge not so much about it. You know, what’s the number of people that I influence or the number of clicks I get or anything like that. It’s just how much do I value the ones that are really, really important to me.

Tim Ulbrich: [00:25:00] Yeah, what I’m hearing there, Dave, is, is depth over volume, right? Obviously in the,

David Zgarrick: much

Tim Ulbrich: in the role that you were in, you had a significant opportunity at the institution level, at the association level with your involvement to have a volume impact. And not to say you also didn’t have a depth of impact. Of course you did.

But here we’re talking about a more intimate number of individuals with an opportunity to go. Go much deeper. So that’s beautiful. I do want to talk about X’s and O’s for a moment. And you know, you, you retired at a time, as we often say that the time at when someone retires is one of the most important decisions are going to make.

David Zgarrick: it is.

Tim Ulbrich: There’s things that are out of our control sometimes, but there are things that are in our control. Like how have we prepared for entering into something like a volatile market? And while you retired into a market that has continued to overall trend up, it’s, it’s had its fair share of volatility. And so how have you planned for that in advance and how has that played out?

So that the volatility really isn’t impacting [00:26:00] you a whole lot.

David Zgarrick: You know, one of the things I’ll go back to it. I know this is something I touched on in the previous podcast is the important role of working with others, including financial advisors. There’s a tax advisor that I also have for many, many years. My tax advisor was actually my father. Father, um, my, my father, while he’s still alive and is still doing others, people’s taxes, I, I, I have a good laugh.

He actually dropped me as a client, uh, the, the, the, the year that my wife and I, um, had three different state tax, um, you know, taxes to filing in addition to our federal and, and move to from one part of the country to another part of the country, that kind of stuff, my, my dad said, you know what, I’ve had enough, you find yourself somebody with, uh, you know, who can help you deal with all of that.

The different things of that kind of stuff. And so it’s important to work with those things. I mean, we’re pharmacists, we’re smart people, we like to think that we [00:27:00] can do a lot of this work ourselves, and we do a lot of this lifting ourselves. But there’s also things that are Very, very helpful to get advice on that are not inherent to who we are, the kind of work that we do.

And I have certainly come to appreciate the contributions that our financial advisors add, um, farmer, um, that our, our tax person has had, um, you know, they, they keep me, they give me information. That’s, that’s very, very helpful. Um, so that you don’t necessarily have to, shall we say, worry about. A volatile market, you know, you know, the, the, you know, you know, starting with, let’s say, the value of having some cash sitting around.

So, so that, you know, one of the realities of life, of course, whether you’re retired or not, is you will have expenses and you will need cash for those expenses. And so how, how you deal with. You know, having that cash [00:28:00] and where that cash is and how accessible it is to you and those types of things that, you know, I’ve gotten very good advice over, over the course of the years, um, from the folks that I work with and, um, and they, they’ve really helped us, um, you know, not worry about, gee, the market went up.

2 percent the other day or down 3 percent the other day or something like that, you know, um, you know, I’m, I don’t worry about, gee, do I have to time that out or anything like that? I mean, yeah, timing is important and you always want to sell into an upmarket. So to speak, um, and, and so, so the good news is, yeah, making sure that you have a cash reserve set aside so that you’ve got the cash when you need it.

And when you need to raise some more cash, you can have the luxury of waiting until, yeah, the market’s doing a little bit better. Let’s, let’s sell off some assets now and, and then keep that back in our [00:29:00] cash reserves.

Tim Ulbrich: The, the visual that’s coming to mind for me, Dave, as you’re talking and thinking back to our previous interview is, you know, if we think about your nest egg. You’ve, you’ve built this bubble kind of around it, uh, to protect it and, and to give you some options and flexibility of if, or when you need to pull from it.

Right. It’s the cash on hand. Uh, it’s the consulting work that you, you’ve been doing, obviously the hard work and diligence that you’ve done to maintaining a lifestyle that you have, uh, some margin, you know, uh, month to month. And in two 92, you talked about, you know, what was your WTF fund and how your emergency fund.

That thankfully you didn’t have to pull from very much, was able to just grow, grow, grow. You didn’t borrow from it. And then eventually that became an important cash resource when you got into

David Zgarrick: is. And essentially it’s, you know, when we think about a nest egg, of course, you know, a nest egg is no one single, you know, asset for, for most of us. It’s, it’s a variety of assets. Um, it was the WTF fund. It’s our. [00:30:00] Base retirement savings funds. It was equity that we had in real estate and other types of assets for us.

There’s some, uh, life insurance assets in there as well. You know, there, there’s a variety of different assets and, you know. Good news is, I mean, we, you know, you know, we had retirement savings. We have not touched a single dime of those retirement savings yet. And that’s by plan. Um, you know, you know, we’re honestly the, the other assets that we had that allowed us to make this transition, you know, we’re, uh, you know, the, the plan was that we would have five to seven years of assets, um.

Set aside before we would even think about starting to utilize our retirement assets and, and that’s still very much the plan. Um, you know, we’re, we’re sitting here right now, you know, still, in essence, using the WTF fund to finance, you know, what our life is now. And in terms of. You know, real estate. [00:31:00] Yeah, we were able to make the transition from Massachusetts to Colorado back here to Maine, essentially working within the equity envelope of the real estate that we owned and still still work within that envelope.

It’s, you know, you know, making this move did not create, you know, additional obligations or additional expenses. You know, really, you know, we’re, you know, honestly, the cost of living in Maine is even a little bit lower than what the cost of living in Colorado was. So we’re, you know, probably even coming out ahead a little bit, even though we had, of course, you know, expenses involved in making that transition.

Tim Ulbrich: rename Dave, my emergency fund bucket, my WTF fund, because what I like about calling it that is it, it’s a mindset shift, right? Because when, when things happen, you know, I’m thinking about an issue we’ve got going on right now with our roof and, uh, you know, it’s those moments, especially when you’re working so hard on other goals that [00:32:00] if we have prepared for that.

And we can be somewhat lighthearted about it, which is like, that sucks, but let’s write the check and move on. That’s a totally different mindset shift than like, uh, like I’m so mad and frustrated.

David Zgarrick: I’ll go back to one of the things I mentioned a little bit earlier. I mean, my wife and I, it’s not exactly the sexiest or most desirable purchase that we made over the course of a year, but, but we, we made a decision to, to buy a whole house generator, um, for this house. And one of the things we learned relatively quickly after moving to Maine is the power goes out.

And the power may go out for days at a time and, um, and you want to be prepared for that. And yeah, one could go down to Costco and buy just a little generator that might keep your house, you know, keep something going or something like keep your refrigerator running or something like that. But that’s probably not what you really wanted to rely on or depend on.

Um, so, so we did buy a whole house generator [00:33:00] and yeah, there were expenses involved in getting the generator and having it professionally installed and all that stuff. But at the end of the day, I was, I was happy that, yeah, not only that we could do that, but we just had the resources to be able to do that.

Um, Going back to even the, the, the major decision about when to retire, you know, one, one thing I reflect on it, you know, most of us don’t, you know, it’s interesting. A lot of us think, yeah, I’m going to, I’m going to work at age 65 or 67. And, and if you do that, that’s great. You know, I, I, I think in, in our case, you know, we had just both gotten to a point where our, our personal values, let’s say we’re increasingly becoming different than those things that were valued by our employers and, and there was.

Not much that either of us were going to do to change how our employers actually did things. The only people we could actually influence or change were ourselves. [00:34:00] And, and the decisions we made was to consciously step away. Um, and, and we, you know, again, our ability to be able to do that was predicated by a large amount by the fact that we did have a fund set aside that set was, yeah, maybe originally was like, if there was some emergency pop up or something like that, like I said, we were very fortunate.

We never had that emergency. The fund kept growing. And at the end of the day, the fund was such that it It provided us with a bridge to be able to step into performance, maybe a bit earlier than, than either of us had originally envisioned. And, um, at the end of the day, I was really, really happy that we had that fun.

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, a subtle, but important thing I’m picking up on is the, the frequency of the we and our language. And I bring this up because I would remiss if I didn’t ask, you know, transitioning into retirement for couples. [00:35:00] It’s a household decision, and sometimes those timelines align, sometimes they don’t.

Sometimes people are on the same page. Sometimes there’s not. Uh, and everyone’s situation of course, is different, but any any wisdom you can shed there in terms of how you have navigated this?

David Zgarrick: terms of how we navigated it. It was interesting because I think for many, many years, my wife and I had actually quite different visions about how we were going to approach this. I, you know, retirement was probably something in retirement. Financial planning was probably fair to say a little bit more on my radar than it was on my wife’s.

You know, I. Yeah. My father was a good example for me in that he too retired relatively early age 57 and 27, 28 years later is still around and is still a retired still doing what he likes doing and is doing very well. And that was a great example for me. Um, I think my [00:36:00] wife originally was going to. Had every intention on keeping on working even after I took a step back.

Um, it’s fair to say then COVID happened and, um, you know, for all of us that work in healthcare and work in the healthcare fields, um, you know, that was a real seminal event. for a lot of people. And it was interesting, you know, while I as a college professor made this transition and was, you know, all of a sudden started working from home and doing zoom meetings and all that kind of stuff, um, which had its own set of challenges.

Um, my wife was a pharmacist at a hospital. Um, and as we all likely know, hospitals kept Working during the pandemic and those people that worked at hospitals kept on going in and, um, which, of course, had its own set of challenges. And I think going through those challenges, um, really. Change my wife’s mindset as well, [00:37:00] in terms of, you know, how much longer do I want to keep doing this?

And do I feel valued by, um, the organization that I, that I work for? And, um, you know, we, you know, as 2020, 2021, 2022 is happening. I think we both Increasingly, we’re on the same page that, you know, this, this is a good time to make a make that switch. And we, we know that there have been many others of us that have have joined us.

If anything, it has created, I’ll say one challenge in retirement and moving from one part of a country to another part. Now, back to this part is finding health care. Uh, we, we know that there have been many other health care professionals that have taken the last few years and have said, yeah, I’m going to step away.

And, um, that has, of course, created some challenges for a health care system that was challenged to start with in many ways. Um, and so, um, yeah, there is, [00:38:00] there’s been a challenge. It’s been, um. You know, getting health insurance, um, finding health care providers, getting appointments with those health care providers and all that stuff.

But again, that could be a whole nother show for another day. Okay,

Tim Ulbrich: I didn’t give you a heads up about this one, but I think it’s so important that we lean on your wisdom as we think about our listeners in different phases of their career. So Dave, I’m thinking about three groups.

Obviously everyone’s on their own path, but I’m thinking about those that are in the first five to 10 years, new practitioners, those that are in the middle of their career, and then those that are coming up on retirement. Uh, in the next five or so years. And so let, let’s start with those that are on that front part of their career, first five to seven years, new practitioners, they’re facing, you know, significant amounts of student loan debt, expensive phase of life might be starting a family, trying to buy a home.

[00:39:00] Getting started with investing, all these things. What advice would you have for that group? 

David Zgarrick: Start early. Jump in. Don’t be afraid. I mean, yes, you you do have obligations, particularly student loan debt and everything that you that you are going to have to take care of and do take care of those things. But get into the habit of saving money being, you know, being mindful of how you spend money.

And that’s not to say don’t do things that you want to do. It’s not just It’s about taking care of your needs. It’s about, um, you know, having your wants and, and making sure that you’re taking care of those as well. But, but jump in, don’t, um, don’t get into, um, analysis or paralysis by analysis. Don’t, don’t, you know, basically say, oh my God, there’s all these things that I have to do.

And then at the end of the day, you end up not doing anything. Um, jump in.

Tim Ulbrich: How about those pharmacists, Dave, like myself and that midpoint of their career where, where they’re looking at retirement and it’s [00:40:00] still perhaps off in the distance, but they can feel it. It’s, it’s coming, uh, often in a very expensive. You know, phase of life, maybe, maybe the student loans are gone. Maybe they’re not.

Uh, you know, I think about our situation, uh, for, for kids in the house, expenses are, are high. We’re thinking about kids college where maybe perhaps some listeners, they’ve got elderly parents, they’ve got young kids or they’re kind of in that middle. What, what about advice for them?

David Zgarrick: Have a plan, develop a plan, and then let that plan work out. Uh, you know, one of the things that Really helped us was, shall we say, being able to save for retirement to do things without having to make a lot of day to day conscious decisions. I mean, you know, for example, you know, most of us work for organizations where we can set aside money.

And and have that money, you know, basically, you know, it’s going to go into certain pots and it’s going to work and do certain things and just so have a plan. Let it [00:41:00] do that. You know, don’t don’t necessarily. You’re right. We all people in the middle of their careers are have very, very busy lives and a lot of other obligations.

And so the less you know, the less that you have to even Think about, you know, financial management is probably a good thing at this stage of your life, yet still having that plan in place. I’m not saying don’t be engaged in financial management and don’t do these things, but but have a have a pathway or a plan such that, you know, try to make things as automatic as possible so that you don’t have to put a lot of day to day effort into into managing these things.

Uh,

Tim Ulbrich: well, like put the plan in place and then automate it so important and Dave, that final group, those coming up on retirement, maybe in the next five or 10 years about to make that transition. Yes, financially, but also for the things beyond the numbers.

What, what advice would you have

David Zgarrick: [00:42:00] you know, take some time to think about what you want your life to be moving forward. I mean, there is, you know, most of us are not in situations where we have to retire or step away at a, at a certain time at a certain date. Um, you know, and, you know, to those folks that are still really enjoying what they are doing every day, if that’s, if that’s what makes you, you.

Then then do that. Keep doing that. I guess in some ways, you know, when it comes out to have that conversation with yourself, what makes you you? What is it that that you really value and is really important? Is it time with your spouse time with your family time taking care of yourself? Um, your community?

Where do you want to be? Who do you want to be with? You know, ask yourself those types of questions and and then think about how do you make Those things happen. Um, I’ll say people in our age [00:43:00] frame right now is the ones that are getting later in our careers and so forth. Um, you know, we, we still have a variety of obligations.

We think about to, you know, one of the things that I think is very incumbent upon many of us in our age age, we’re, we’re fortunate in many ways and it’s that many of us still have parents around and so forth, but they are aging. And one of the things we see is my, my wife’s, uh, my wife’s mother passed away about a month ago.

And you’re constantly reminded of Nothing is forever. And you do want to make sure that you are taking the time to spend time with people who are important to you and to do the things that are important to you. Whether it may be take that big trip or go spend time with family or whatever, because, because you do realize.

You know, even though we plan for, yeah, retirement could be 20, 30, 40 years. Um, nothing’s guaranteed. Nothing will be forever. [00:44:00] And, and, and so I think as you approach, you know, moving into making that transition with the mindset of who do I want to be, what’s important to me, what are my values and then how do I live those values?

Um, You know, that that’s certainly been our mindset as, as we’ve approached, um, you know, especially the last two, three years. And, and I anticipate that’s what it’s going to be as we continue moving forward.

Tim Ulbrich: Dave, such wisdom there. We really appreciate you taking time to come on the show. I know you’ve been an inspiration to me and this is certainly going to be valuable to our listeners and our community. So again, thank you so much. And, uh, looking forward to following up in the future again.

David Zgarrick: Thank you. Thank you so much, Tim. Uh, again, you provide such a wonderful service to, to so many of us, um, in our profession and beyond, you know, there’s so many people that can benefit from the type of work that you do, and I’m just happy to be part of it.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you, Dave. Take care.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 392: Keeping Your Investment Portfolio FIT


Tim Baker, CFP®, and Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, share strategies to address fees, inflation, and taxes, helping you keep your investment portfolio fit and achieve your financial goals.

Episode Summary

In this episode, Tim Baker, CFP® and Tim Ulbrich, PharmD discuss a crucial topic related to personal finance: keeping your investment portfolio fit. 

Tim and Tim explore three silent threats to your investments—fees, inflation, and taxes. Learn practical strategies to manage fund fees, mitigate inflation’s impact, and use tax-efficient approaches to safeguard your portfolio. Whether you’re starting to save or nearing retirement, this episode delivers valuable tips to protect and grow your wealth.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:00] Introduction and New Year Greetings
  • [00:12] The Importance of Keeping Your Investment Portfolio Fit
  • [01:32] Understanding Investment Fees
  • [02:08] Expense Ratios Explained
  • [09:12] Other Types of Investment Fees
  • [12:35] Advisor Fees and Their Impact
  • [20:36] Inflation and Its Effects on Investments
  • [26:19] Strategies for Pre-Retirees and Retirees
  • [31:06] Taxes and Investment Income
  • [36:37] Building a Retirement Paycheck
  • [39:39] Conclusion and Final Thoughts

Episode Highlights

“ Step one is we got to save money. That  that’s hard enough. But when we do that important step, we want to make sure that we can hold onto as much of the pie as we possibly can.” – Tim Baker [9:01]

“ And not all financial planning services are created equal. And so it’s not just a black and white discussion of what are the advisor fees, but  what’s the construct and the makeup of the advising. And then  those fees can look very different and whether they’re transparent and whether or not it has a return on investment with it.” – Tim Ulbrich [13:00]

 “ I always tell the story of when I got into the industry and my parents were working with an advisor and  I asked the question, “ Hey, what are you paying for that? The answer I got was like, oh, it’s free kind of through your dad’s work.  And I’m like, uh, you know, there’s no free lunch.” -Tim Baker [13:55]

“ If you’re in a relationship and you’re not sure how the advisor is making their fee. That’s a big red flag.” -Tim Ulbrich [17:39]

“ The best number in terms of progress with the financial plan is your net worth, right? The assets, the things that  you own minus the liabilities, things that you owe.” -Tim Baker [18:33]

“ The timing of when you retire is going to be one of the most important things. It’s related to your success in terms of having your assets not run out on you.”-Tim Baker [29:02]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, happy new year. Welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Happy new year. Uh, can’t believe, uh, we’re on the other side of the new, uh, the new year already. The holidays, it’s, it’s pretty crazy.

Tim Ulbrich: We are, and we’ve got a topic that is connected to the theme of new year, but of course we’re going to bring it into first personal finance and that’s keeping your investment portfolio fit, fit, standing for fees, inflation, and taxes, really three things that are silent forces that can be working behind the scenes.

On the investment portfolio. You might not always see them directly, but their impact can really be big, especially over time. And Tim, that’s where you come in. That’s where our team of the only certified financial planners come in that have worked with pharmacists, clients all across the country to navigate this topic.

This is an area, right? That doesn’t really get [00:01:00] enough attention since I think it’s hard enough to focus on prioritizing saving. Let alone worrying about maintaining the integrity of those savings. Right.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And, and this, and this, if, if not paid attention to can be the, the drag right on your portfolio and your ability to build wealth over time. And, um, it’s important to, you know, especially, you know, when you’re evaluating your, your finances, which, you know, maybe a lot of us are doing at the start of the new year, um, to, to take a look at it and see, you know, Where we’re at with things.

So, um, yeah, it can be kind of one of those things that are behind the scenes, especially if you’re, if you’re struggling just to kind of get the portfolio and kind of the wealth building aspect of your, of your finances off the ground.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, let’s start with fees. We’ve all heard the saying, you get what you pay for, but sometimes in investing it might be the opposite, especially regarding fund fees. The may more you pay in fees, the less you actually keep in returns, potentially. We’ll, we’ll talk about that in more detail. And whether it’s from fund management fees to trading [00:02:00] commissions, there really can be many hidden costs that can add up, especially in the long term.

And it’s important that we understand what these fees are and whether or not they’re, they’re transparent, or we’re even aware of what they are. So walk us through the different types of fees that investors might encounter on their portfolios.

Tim Baker: Yeah, probably, probably the one of the most important ones, um, that, that we talk about is the expense ratio. So the expense ratio is essentially what a fund takes. Um, to manage said fund, right? So the way I explain this, Tim is, you know, let’s say I’m a, a fund manager and I’m managing billions of dollars of a large cap fund, right?

So my job is to, you know, gather information and, and really buy and sell stocks, large cap stocks inside of my funds that my investor has shares in. So for me to do that, I need. You know, a place of business. I need an [00:03:00] office space, which might be on, on wall street or thereabouts. I need analysts. I need to pay for information.

I need to, um, pay myself, pay salaries. So all of that work that’s done, you know, needs, you know, you know, revenue would essentially support that. So what the expense ratio is, is a percentage of the, the money that, that the fund manager is managing that they take out. Um, to basically pay themselves and all those things that I mentioned.

So the, the big, the hard part about this is that it’s not necessarily a line item on your, on your like, account statement. So, if you look at sometimes they’re listening to the account statement as, hey, you’re paying, you know, a half a percent, 0. 5 percent or 1 percent or, or, um, You know, 5 basis points, which is 0.

05%. So it might be listed as this is what the expense ratio is, but you can’t really draw a line from that [00:04:00] to, like, what’s actually being taken out of your account, which, which is hard. Right? So, and what we often see is that. You know, there’s a lot of people that just don’t pay attention to this at all.

Um, and if we take the example of a large cap, you know, one of the, one of the big things, which like a, which with a large cap is that, you know, you can buy a large cap where you’re paying. 0. 03, three basis points, or you’re paying way north of that 1%. And really the only thing that’s different is the fee itself.

When you actually like, you know, unwrap that fund and you look at the individual stocks that they’re in, it’s all the ones that we know, Microsoft and Amazon and things like that. So you’re kind of paying a premium for. I don’t know what a name potentially. So it’s really important when you’re looking at, when you’re selecting your investments, or if you’re working with an advisor and they’re helping you select investments that, you know, you are getting.

Bang for your buck. Right. So it, my, my thing is like, if I’m going to pay, you know, a hundred [00:05:00] basis points, you know, 1 percent versus five basis points. So that’s a 20 X difference in fee. For me, the way that I look at that, this is like, I should be getting 20 times more performance or 20 times safer. For the same amount of performance, but it’s typically not the case, right?

It’s typically not that. So, you know, I can say that, you know, where we, what we typically like to do is drive those fees, that expense ratio down as, as much as possible. And some of the other fees that we’ll talk about, um, and really let the portfolio do what, what it, what it does, what the market do, what it does.

So the expense ratio is a, is a huge, huge part of that.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, when, when we hear, you know, five basis points or 0. 05 or three basis points, 0. 03 versus something like 1%, You know, I think we look at that with a little bit of shock and awe, but, you know, the average investor, if you’re not thinking about this, looking at these, if you don’t feel them right in your portfolio, necessarily, you know, it’s not impacting monthly cashflow per se.

You might look at those and say, [00:06:00] how, how much does that really matter? Right. So why, why does a type of difference when you look at something like five basis points or 0. 05 versus 1%, you know, over a long period of time, the question really is impact. What, what is the potential of that impact?

Tim Baker: Yeah. So, I mean, if you, if you take a, you know, for just simple math, if you take a, , 100, 000 portfolio, and you’re in a fund that is charging you 5 basis points,. That’s 50 per year for that. Um, if we stack that up, so let’s say I’m invested in the same type of large cap fund, but it’s charging me 1%.

That’s 1, 000. Per year. So like, you know, if we add zeros to this, we can kind of see where this is going. Right? So, so to me again, like, I don’t, you know, one of the, one of the positions that we, that we pay a little bit more and they’re newer, um, and more specialized is, is like the spot Bitcoin ETFs. Like, I think the, the fund that we’re in, it’s, it’s 20 basis point, but typically our, our portfolios are four or five basis points, [00:07:00] 0.

04, 0. 05. So what I tell the client, as I tell myself is like, if I’m paying more and I’m not getting that return, or it’s not safer.

It doesn’t make sense. So to me, it’s driving those down, you know, um, as much as possible. And you can see the numbers like, again, like if I look at 1%, I’m like, oh, it’s not really that much. But over time and over many years, it’s just, those are the, those are the things that erode, erode your gain and they don’t really need to be.

So, um, you know, and to back up, like if you buy an all stock portfolio, like you don’t buy a fund, you don’t have Expense ratio, because they’re not inside of a fund. You’re buying the individual stocks. The danger there is you’re potentially, you know, um, paying commission. So anytime you buy and sell you can, you, you are charged a fee and then just the, the risk that you take, you know, in terms of like, are you broadly diversified?

Are you putting too many eggs in, in one basket? So, you know, what, what I view as, you know, good investment practice is I can, I can build a well diversified Portfolio, um, for minimal cost and again, I would put minimal cost of anything less than, you know, in the 20 to, you know, 10 basis points, like, in that range, um, and feel good about, you know, the, the construction of the portfolio and the risk that I’m taking.

Um, so I, I do think that I, I’m willing to pay the toll, the expense ratio for that and not necessarily buy individual stocks and bonds and things like that.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, you mentioned expense ratios. Um, obviously that, that kind of becomes the top one that we think about, especially if they’re inside of a fund, you mentioned commissions, what, what other types of fees are out there that, that folks might, may not be as aware about?

Tim Baker: Yeah. So if you’re thinking about trading and transaction fees, um, you know, there, there are brokerage commission. So these are fees charged by a broker for executing trades on your behalf. So it could be something like a, a stock trade commission. Um, these are typically flat fee, so it could be anywhere from 5 to 10.

Um, a lot of these have kind of gone, there’s a lot of commission free brokers, um, that have kind of, you know, um, squashed a lot of these, but they’re still there. If you’re, if you’re option trade in, there’s option trade, uh, commission fees, there’s mutual fund, uh, transaction fees. So these can range anywhere.

You know, when I was in the broker deal world, I think it was almost like 30 per trade, right? Typically the range is, you know, 10 to 15. You know, 50 per trade. So, um, they’ll, they’ll, uh, they’ll, you know, brokerage will charge us, you know, to buy and sell, you know, mutual funds. There could be like spread costs.

So the difference, this is the difference between like the bid and the ask price of a particular trade. So they might, um, have a little bit of a spread. So they’re, so, so the, you know, the brokerage is making money. Um, one of the big things that I remember, especially being in the broker dealer world is account maintenance fees.

So these are, these are fees charged, uh, for maintaining an account. Um, such as an IRA. Um, and these, you see these more [00:10:00] Tim in like low interest rate environments. So they’re not making a whole lot of money on the float of the money that, you know, cash that they’re sitting on. So they try to find ways to make money.

Um, and these, these could be. I think when I saw them, it was like 50 an account. I see them anywhere from like 25 to a hundred dollars annually. Um, sometimes there’s foreign transaction fees. So these are applied to trades on international exchanges. There could be redemption fees. So these are fees for selling certain types of mutual funds or ETF within a specified, like holding period.

Um, so as an example, like if you, if you look at your account statement and you see, Like, uh, a mutual fund that you had that has an a, like next to it, that’s an a share mutual fund that you were probably, uh, sold that had like an upfront commission. Right. And, um, a lot of people don’t know that up going in, um, and they pay that and they’re like, what, what the heck happened?

There’s also C shares. [00:11:00] That you pay a little bit on the front end and then you pay an ongoing fee, um, which is not great. Those are typically the worst ones. And then you have a B1, which is kind of an in between that. There’s like a holding period that you can sometimes get redemption. So being, um, where we, we don’t, you know, we don’t operate in them, but I do come across a lot of clients that are like, oh, I’m not paying commissions.

And I look at their statement and there’s A’s and C’s. That’s what you typically see, excuse me, all over the place and they just don’t realize it. So. And probably the last one that I hear is kind of like robo advisor fees, right? I’m in a particular program and I’m paying, you know, a certain, certain amount.

So those are the ones that, you know, um, expense ratio, expense ratio, and then trading, trading fees, transaction fees, and kind of a slew of those that you’ll, you’ll often see.

Tim Ulbrich: Is that, is that it, that’s all you got on the list of, uh, potential fees that

Tim Baker: Yeah. And then we haven’t even gotten into the advisor fees, which we can talk about, but yeah. Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: let’s talk about that. Right. Because obviously, you know, that’s the work that we do and it [00:12:00] has to be factored in and, and full disclaimer, we’re, we’re biased in the value of the work that we bring clients. And we, we believe when you talk about advisor fees, Tim, when it’s done well, which is why we believe in the fee only model.

That’s why we have the model that we do that. Yeah, it’s a fee. Yeah. And it’s a fee that we have to factor in, but there’s a return on investment of that fee that we also have to account for. And not all financial planning services are created equal. And so it’s not just a black and white discussion of what are the advisor fees, but what’s the construct and the makeup of the advising.

And then those fees can look very different and whether they’re transparent  so how do you think about the advisor fee piece?

Tim Baker: Yeah. And I, and I think, I think a big part of this is just like transparency, right? Like oftentimes, you know, when I would, I’d ask people that I’ve worked with an advisor, like, what are you paying them? They’re like, uh, I don’t know. Like, and I always tell the story, you know, of, you know, when, when, when I got into the industry and my parents were working with an advisor, you know, I asked the question, I’m like, Hey, what are you, what are you paying for that?

And it’s, you know,  the answer I got was like, oh, it’s, it’s, it’s free kind of through your dad’s work. And I’m, I’m, And I’m like, uh, you know, there’s no free lunch. Right. So, and then years later, when I actually looked at it, you know, the fees were significant, like North of eight grand a year, right. Um, in the product.

So, you know, in the, in the broker dealer world, again, no shade to that, you know, where it’s more like fee based, so you can charge commissions, you can charge flat fee percentages. I think the problem is, is like. You know, what the advisor is trying to do is one help the client, but also make a living. So, so they’re, they’ll say, Hey, I can, I can get you in this investment and then I earn a commission.

Um, or I get you in this investment. I earn kind of an ongoing fee. And then maybe I sell you, you know, a life insurance product that I earn a commission or an annuity in our commission, or I charge you hourly. So it’s really just confusing. Right. So I think like. Transparency of fee and like, what you’re paying is really important.

And I think marrying that up to like the value that you’re receiving, right? So there’s some people that they view comprehensive financial planning as. Selling you an insurance product and managing your money. And that’s it. And then maybe talking to you once every couple of years, we don’t view that as comprehensive financial planning.

Like we, we view that as very light financial planning, if, if financial planning at all, maybe some investment management. So when you look at the different ways that advisors can charge, you know, fees, it could be a flat fee. It could be an AUM assets under management, which is a percentage of what they’re managing.

And it can be an. Assets under advisement, so it’s, you know, the feet, the investments that they’re managing directly at their own custodian, but also managing indirectly, say, at like, a 4 or 1 K or a 529. it could be commissions that we talked about, which could be commissions on insurance. It could be commissions on investment, which is kind of what we’re talking about here.

An hourly fee or kind of a combination of all these things. So, you know, I think I think the, the, the, the hard part for the consumer for the client is to determine a, like, what the heck are they paying? And are they getting value for that? Um, and if they’re not, then obviously, you know, reassessing it. So, you know, and there’s.

There’s pros and cons for all of these, right? Um, and there’s, there is no such thing as, um, you know, sometimes advisors, especially in the feeling where we’ll say, you know, we have, you know, we give conflict free advice that does not exist. It doesn’t in any model, there’s always a conflict of interest. And I think, you know, the advisors that that is willing to say, like, Hey, we think this is in your best interest.

However, cards on the table, it’s also going to change our fee, increase our fee. Um, and that can go the other way too. It’s also going to decrease our fee. Um, you know, I think those are the type of advisors that are my people, you know, we want what’s best for the, for the, for the client, but understanding, you know, what model you’re in and then like what you’re actually paying is going to be half the battle.

And, and, and more often than not, when I talk to prospective clients and I ask them, Hey, what are they, what are they, what are you paying? They’re like, I literally have no idea. And I think that’s problematic.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And that’s what my experience tells me, Tim, is that, you know, especially the pharmacist households that we’ve worked with, even those that decided, Hey, we’re not, we’re not a good fit. Um, and that’s okay as well is transparency is what matters, right? They want to know what’s involved.

Everyone has a different definition of what, what is return on investment. What’s value that can change in different seasons of life. So, um, I think the transparency pieces is so critical. And if you’re in a relationship and you’re not sure how the advisor is making their fee. That’s a big red flag. Right.

And I think something worth exploring further.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I think, you know, um, you know, when we talk about fees, like, you know, you’re no model is going to fit everybody. Right? So I think like, it’s just again, being comfortable understanding what you’re paying. Um, and, and, and what I was going to say was, you know, oftentimes, especially with pharmacists, type a scientific minds, they’re like, okay, if I’m going to give you, you know, X amount of dollars in fees.

What is the ROI? And I’m like, well, define ROI because the way that we look at this, the way that we look at ROI is that you, there is a quantifiable that you can count ROI, but I don’t even think it has anything to do with investment returns. I really think the best number in terms of progress with the financial plan is your net worth, right?

The assets, the things that you own minus the liabilities, things that you owe.  But I think the other unspoken thing here is the, not the quantifiable things, but the qualifying things of, of what, what have we done with your plan with, with your life plan supported by the financial plan?

That’s hard to count. Whether it’s that, that family, that. Finally, you could buy the house when they didn’t think they could or had the baby or retired early or pivoted careers or got back into a passion that they had put on the sideline for a long time because of whatever reasons. Those are the things that get me fired up.

They have nothing to do with. Ones and zeros in the bank account or net worth or things like that. And I think if you’re in that type of relationship and you have that type of trust and rapport, that’s worth a lot. Um, so that’s my soapbox, Tim.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree. And, and I, you know, would be remiss if I didn’t put a plug in here for what we do and, and for those folks listening that would like to learn more about our fee only financial planning services, what our team of certified financial planners can offer, um, you Working with households all across the country, uh, virtually, you can learn more, your financial pharmacist.com. You’ll see an option at the top, right? You book a free discovery call to learn about those services. Tim, let’s shift to inflation. Um, so in addition to fees, we have to pay attention to inflation and this one feels a little bit sneaky, right? I mean, you’re making money, but inflation is quietly chipping away at your purchasing power.

Yes. Today. At the grocery store, I think we’ve all felt that recently and and perhaps five six years ago It was hey inflation what but we all have felt that more recently But not only in our expenses today might we feel that but also in the future When we think about how far our savings will go so explain to us how inflation erodes the purchasing power Of an investor’s returns over time

Tim Baker: Yeah. So when I talk about like, cause there’s a lot of people out there. That are super risk adverse. Right. So they’re like, Tim, do I really have to invest? Can I just like stuff my mattress or put money in my bank account, my high yields. And I call it a day. And the answer is like, especially if we’re aspiring to be a seven figure pharmacist, plug the book, um, answers.

No, you can’t. And the, when I talk about this, you know, um, with, with, in, in, in, in different talks, like when I look at inflation, if we take, If we take a latte that you buy at Starbucks in 2025, and let’s say it costs 4 dollars. Um, and maybe that’s just a plain coffee these days. But if you, if you, if you get that, that coffee at 4 dollars, if we use historical rates of inflation, and most advisors will use about 3%.

Now, you know, we’ve had years and spikes that, you know, some people are like, well, let’s use 3 and a half or 4%. But if we use 3 percent and we fast forward 30 years, from 2025 to 2055. That same latte that would cost 4. 00. Costs 10 30 years from now. So what that means is that your dollar just goes less far.

And this is why my dad’s in the 70s. You’d always talk about, you know, his grandparents would give him a nickel and you go to the candy store and buy half the store. It seemed right. You can’t buy anything for a nickel today, right? So the, the idea of investing and having a solid investment plan is to keep pace with the inflation monster, but then also get ahead of the tax man, which is what we’re going to talk about next.

So unfortunately we can’t bury our hands, head in the sand or, you know, and I, and I say that, Facetiously and just put money into a check into our savings account and call it a day because over time that, you know, 400, 000, you know, if we, if we look at it from an investment is going to be equivalent to 1, 000, 000 or the purchasing power of 1, 000, 000 in the future.

So. That’s why we need to invest and take appropriate risk and equities and bonds. And I would argue equities, you know, mostly through, you know, the working years of most people, or especially early on. And then as we get closer, you know, start to to add more bonds and fixed income. But that’s really what it is because, you know, every year, you know, the price of goods and services.

Goes up. Um, and it’s a systemic thing that we can’t escape. Um, you know, that we really have to adapt our financial plans to.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And I think Tim, it can be easy to lose sight of historical trends when we’re in

Tim Baker: Yeah, for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: time periods. Right. So, you know, I’m thinking of this moment while we’re recording, although rates have come down, high yield savings accounts are. 4 percent ish, right. Give or take, um, we’ve had historically high inflation, you know, the last couple, a couple of years for obvious reasons we’ve talked about on the show.

And so I think sometimes people look at that and they say, oh, well, you know, 4%, that’s really good historical rate of inflation, but we can’t confuse those. Right. Because just a few years ago, what was our high yield savings account earning less than 2%? Well, I mean, for a while right down there, I mean, even lower than that.

So when we zoom out. Yeah, we get, get those emails, right? Your, your savings account has gone down, but you know, if we zoom out, we look at the historical rate of inflation. If we’re not investing and it taking some level of calculated risk and what that risk tolerance and capacity is, is different for, for everyone.

And that has to be customized, but if we’re not doing that, right. Our, our long term investments really come to be at risk and in terms of us achieving our long term goals.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And I’ll give you an example. So if we talk about the long term effects of inflation, so, um, over time, inflation compounds, meaning it’s cumulative effect on person power grows significantly. So, like, if we take 100, 000 portfolio and we invested at, um, we get a 6 percent annual return over 20 years.

Without inflation, that portfolio grows to from 100, 000 we’ll call it if we, if we then interject reality, which is about a 3 percent inflation, the real value of that investment, if we adjust for inflation would be 180, 000. So that’s, that’s the, that’s the rub here. And again, that’s, that’s why, you know, when people are like, Oh, I’m like really conservative.

I don’t want to take risk. I’m like, you kind of have to get in front of this, you know, especially in, you know, younger in your younger years, um, you know, to get in front of again, inflation and then, and then the tax man.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And this is also why, when we’re doing things like retirement projections, nest egg calculations, especially for people that are maybe in that, you know, front half of their career, let’s say they look at these numbers and they’re like, is this wonky math, right? These seem like they’re huge. They’re out of reach.

Well, we’re, we’re thinking about it in today’s dollars. And obviously we have to be thinking about it. In the future as well, Tim, you alluded to retirement age a little bit. When you’re talking about asset allocation, let’s just touch on that a little bit more. So for maybe some of the pre retirees listening or people that are in the second half of their career that are thinking about retirement, it’s on, on the horizon and are concerned about the long term effects of inflation on their portfolios, ability to generate income and to sustain itself.

What are some general strategies that we’re, we’re thinking about employing? I know you’ve talked before on the show about, Hey, social security, right? It’s, it’s one of those rare vehicles that we have some inflation protection. What, what, what [00:25:00] other thoughts here?

Tim Baker: Yeah. I think as you look at your, your investment strategy, like there are things that, yeah, you mentioned. So that’s why we’re a big, you know, a big believer and really having a very purpose based strategy when it comes to a, uh, social security claim. And because once you made that decision, it’s kind of forever.

And that can really affect the amount of. Inflation protected income that you have coming in the door. Um, so the other things you can think about is there are inflate, there are inflation protected security. So there’s tips treasury inflation, protective securities that are linked, um, to they’re kind of marked to inflation.

So as you know, as, um, Inflation goes up. So does the interest payments for which you, you know, which you receive, um, they don’t necessarily, they’re not necessarily, you know, growth oriented, but it helps you kind of, you know, at least keep pace with that. What we’ve been talking about, you know, at length here is, is really having a portfolio that’s invested in growth oriented assets.

So stocks. Real estate could be commodity commodities that outpace inflation over time that kind of provides a hedge against inflation reinvest in your return. So compound and helps offset offset the negative effects of inflation over time. Another thing that, again, we believe in, um, that not everyone does, but even diversify internationally.

So invested in global markets may reduce inflation. Um, Risk retired, you know, tied to kind of the U. S. Dollar or the economy. And then probably the big thing I hear, or I see, and I actually just had a conversation with perspective client, you know, they were sitting on over 200, 000 of cash and I’m like, why?

And part of its monitor cash holdings. So cash lose unless it’s in a high yield. It’s kind of getting close to that. You know, and today 4 percent cash loses purchase and power quickly in inflationary environments. So you want to really limit the cash that you have idle. So we kind of talk about, you know, you want your emergency fund and any short and medium term goals that you need cash for.

So that might be a trip might be a project on your house, et cetera, et cetera. And that foundation is set to then get money into the market for more, you know, longer, longer term type plan. And so those would be things, you know, like, like I mentioned, you know, it could be, you know, what you invest in, whether it’s tips, you know, growth, equity type of, of stocks could be commodities, but then also some of the things that you’re doing, you know, with cash and, and how you reinvest returns and things like that can help Kind of tackle, tackle the, the, the problem, you know, the, that won’t ever go away, which is the inflation, um, associated with your, with your assets.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. One last thing I would add in here, Tim, and this is where I think the flexibility piece is so important. And we’ve, we’ve talked at length on previous shows about this, but if someone has some flexibility. With their retirement situation, whether that be part time work, whether that be the [00:28:00] timeline of when they retire, and we’re in a high inflationary period or a downturn in the market, right?

Things that we may not anticipate happening. Those types of levers that we can pull go a long way in terms of how we maintain the integrity of our, our investment pie as we go throughout retirement, so it’s not a set it and forget it so important when we think, you know, I think back to my early years of saving.

You know, coming out of pharmacy school and it’s like, all right, we’re going to pay it away, whatever, 20, 25 percent of our income. And we’ll kind of think about this tomorrow and that that’s good early on. But then you get to this point in time where we start to ask this question. I’ll be like, Hey, are we on track?

And you know, what is the horizon timeline? And then more nuanced questions, like some of the tax strategies, when we think about withdrawals or, Hey. You know, the markets had an unexpected downturn or we’re, we’re in a down market for a longer period of time. And maybe it’s not the best time to retire, or maybe I could retire early.

Right. There’s all these wrinkles that we have to consider as we get closer to that timeline.

Tim Baker: [00:29:00] yeah. And, and, you know, probably the timing of when you retire is going to be one of the most important things that, you know, um, You know, it’s related to your success in terms of having your assets not run out on you.

Tim Ulbrich: All right. The last piece of our, uh, keeping your investment portfolio fit fees, inflation, taxes, taxes is number three, certainly last, but not least. This is a big one, right? They could take a huge chunk out of your investment Income, particularly if you’re not strategic about it. We’ve harped on that on the show many times before about being proactive with your tax planning and how important that is to the financial plan and whether it’s not maximizing tax advantage accounts, whether it’s realizing, you know, capital gains, taxes, when you’re selling investments or taxes on interest income, if you’re not paying attention to taxes, Tim, it can really hurt your returns.

And, and I think tax is just one of those dry topics that, Hey, we’d rather not really think about.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And it’s, it’s another one, it’s another one that has major [00:30:00] implications on, you know, again, your, your ability to, um, grow your wealth and, and, and keep pace with, with lifestyle, especially in retirement and, and, and really throughout your, your, your whole life. So, you know, I, I think, I think one of the big things that I think about, so when I, when I talk about taxes and investment, I kind of lead with a little bit of a depressing, like example.

So like, if we look at a million dollars and a traditional 401k, a million dollars in a Roth IRA, a million dollars in an HSA, et cetera, then one of the questions I always ask is like, how much money do we actually have? And. Unfortunately, we don’t have 3 million or 4 million dollars, how many bucks it is because anything that is gone into a pre tax bucket, like a traditional IRA, a rollover IRA, a traditional 401k uncle Sam has yet to take his bite of the apple.

Right? [00:31:00] So the mechanics of this is like, if I put money into my 401k, let’s say I put 20 grand in, um, I make 100, 000 a year. The IRS looks at me is if I made 80, 000. So I get a deduction for that. So that 20, 000 goes into my, my 401k. It grows tax free, which is great, which means I’m escaping capital gains. I don’t have to pay capital gains.

And then when I pour that money out in retirement, that’s when it gets taxed. Right. So if I have, you know, over time, I have a million dollars there and I’m in a 25 percent tax bracket, actually 750, 000 of that is mine. And 250, 000 of that is the government. So I think what’s really important about taxes and investment is actually something called, um, asset location.

So these are different types of investment accounts that have different, uh, tax treatments. And the, and the three main buckets here, Tim, are the. Uh, The tax deferred accounts, which I just talked about. So this is kind of a traditional 401k traditional IRA. [00:32:00] So these contributions are pre tax and the investment gross tax referred and then the withdrawals are typically taxed at ordinary income levels.

We have the tax free accounts, which is a little bit misleading because you actually pay the taxes, you know, as it goes in. Um, so these are things like Roth IRA, um, Roth 401k. So the contributions are after tax. So I’ve got my paycheck. I’ve already been taxed and I put those money into a Roth. That investment grows tax free and the withdrawals are then tax free.

So when I pour out that money, so if I have a million dollars in a Roth IRA, I pour out all million dollars of that. I actually get all million, all 1 million of that. And then the last one is the. Taxable accounts. These are the brokerage accounts. So these are taxes, taxes are paid annually on interest, dividends, capital gains, typically the contributions are with after tax dollars.

So I was, I was taxed on it, um, through my paycheck. I contribute that to a taxable account. It grows, but then any capital gains, um, interest dividends, [00:33:00] I’m, I’m taxed again. Um, and that’s where we get into things like tax loss harvest. So, you know, depending on where you’re at. geographically where you’re at in life, you want to have a little bit in column a, a little bit in column B, a little bit in column C, right?

So it’s really important to be able to when we’re building, if we fast forward to retirement and we’re building a paycheck, if I’m the maestro and I’m building a retirement paycheck, I know that Maybe we’re getting in some in from consulting part time work team. Maybe we’re getting some in from, um, social security, which is also taxed, but then the gap that I’m trying to make up between those things and what we need to, you know, live in and thrive.

I’m pulling from these 3 buckets and, you know, if I have a balance of those 3 buckets, it benefits me because what I’m trying to do as a planner is fill up your tax bracket in the most efficient way [00:34:00] possible. So I might take some from the pre tax bucket to get you to, you know, to max out that 12% Um, tax bracket.

And then maybe I go to the, um, the, the Roth to then, you know, get the rest. Maybe we’re, we’re retiring at 58. So then I’m, I’m using primarily, um, a brokerage account because anything between before 59 and a half, you know, I get a penalty and pay taxes. So, excuse me, that’s the, the asset location is really important to determine how we then pull it in retirement and what makes the most Efficiency wise, um, from a tax perspective.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And what you’re talking about, Tim is building a retirement paycheck, right? We talked about this on episode 275. We’ll, we’ll link to that in the show notes, but I love that visual. Cause we all, we all can relate to that, right? Throughout our career, whether we work for someone else, we’re self employed, you know, we have some semblance of a, of a paycheck, maybe it’s fixed, maybe it’s variable, you know, for time, but eventually we’re going to get to [00:35:00] this future state where maybe we’re working part time or eventually we’re not working at all, Or we have to produce our own paycheck.

And there’s going to be multiple sources that are feeding into that. You mentioned it could be social security. It could be, uh, an annuity. It could be, uh, coming from an IRA. It could be coming from real estate. It could be coming from a 401k, right? All these different pathways. And it highlights so well, the point that not all buckets and dollars are created equal as you articulated.

So, well, you could have two people that both have 4 million. And where that 4 million is going to go and how it’s going to be deployed could be very different depending on what buckets from a tax standpoint. And it’s important on the front end. So we’re talking withdrawal side with the building and the retirement paycheck, but it’s also important on the front end is we’re saving, not that we can predict everything that will happen in the future.

But if someone says, Hey, Tim, I want to retire early. And they’re serious about that. Well, we got to think about where those buckets of dollars are going to be and how do we build a plan and a way to support that? So, you know, this is where [00:36:00] online nested calculators fall short, right? Just, just punching in numbers and saying, Hey, Tim, you need 3.

4 million saved, like where, how, what’s that going to look like? What are the tax treatments? All those questions have to be answered.

Tim Baker: Yeah. And it’s, it’s so nuanced, right? Even like, we talk about our own situations. Like, we’re two Tim’s in Ohio. Our financial situation is similar, but different. But even, even with slight variation, we just, there’s, there’s certain things that we, that, that I’m doing in my plan that you’re not doing and vice versa.

Right? Like, one of the, one of the cool things about being self employed in Ohio is, you know, your first 250, 000 per year, there is no state income tax. Um, So, you know, when I moved from Maryland, I’m like, Oh, like I need to really take advantage of that. And hit my Roth harder than what I was, because I’d rather pay the tax.

Now, I just pay federal, um, and, you know, use another example. Like, if I decide [00:37:00] to retire in Florida, you know, maybe I don’t I don’t need to do that, you know, but I’m not retired. I’m not planning on doing that. But, you know, if you’re, if you’re working in a state with income tax and retirement with a state that doesn’t, again, there’s legislative risk there because, you know, things could change, but all of those things kind of play a part in this.

Journey, which is what it is. Um, and it, it’s hard to get that from a calculator and, you know, it is nuanced. And I think, um, you know, provide, you know, it requires a level of care and attention, um, especially when we’re talking about the, the nest eggs and, and the assets that were, you know, that we’re working with over time that, you know, just requires some level of love and attention, really.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, great stuff. We covered a lot in a short period of time, fees, inflation, taxes, three really important parts as we think about our investment portfolio. And we really are just scratching the surface on all of those areas. We’ll link to some of the episodes. We’ve got more information in the show notes.

Thank you so much everyone for listening to this episode of the podcast. If you’d like [00:38:00] what you heard, do us a favor, leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts. Or if you’re watching on YouTube, would you help other pharmacists find our show as well? And finally, an important reminder that the content in the show is provided for informational purposes only is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice, information on the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offered by ourselves, any investment or related financial products for more information on this, you can visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com forward slash disclaimer. Thanks so much for listening. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 390: YFP 390: Financial Resolutions: Top 5 Moves for Pharmacists in 2025


Tim Ulbrich, YFP Co-Founder, shares 5 key financial moves to align your goals, enjoy life now, and build a secure future.

Episode Summary

In the first episode of the year, Tim Ulbrich, YFP Co-Founder, dives into strategies for aligning your personal and professional goals to make 2025 your best year yet. He shares five essential financial moves to help you strike the perfect balance between enjoying life today and building a secure future.

Learn actionable tips for setting meaningful financial goals, optimizing your tax planning, organizing your financial documents, automating your savings, and crafting a plan for continuous learning.

Key Points from the Episode

  • [00:00] Welcome to the YFP Podcast
  • [00:50] Balancing Financial Goals for Today and Tomorrow
  • [03:11] Elevate Your Tax Strategy
  • [08:29] Organize Your Financial Documents
  • [12:40] Automate Your Financial Plan
  • [21:42] Commit to Continuous Financial Learning

Episode Highlights

“ So no matter where your experience or goals live, there is no right or wrong. Each of us is on our own journey.” – Tim Ulbrich [2:09]

“Let’s make this year the year that we move the needle on both: those long term savings and investment goals saving for our future selves, while also prioritizing living a rich life today.” – Tim Ulbrich [2:56]

“ Think of automation as the mechanism by which your income is working for you, and it’s automatically funding the priorities that you’ve already set.” – Tim Ulbrich [12:57]

“ We know that we have a system and a list that is prioritized, that if that income comes in, we know exactly what to do. Where we’re going to allocate that, and that is the power of automation.” – Tim Ulbrich [19:06]

“ One of the greatest advantages of that we have of living in the 21st century is that we have access to learning just about anything that we want. And often we can do it at a low or no cost, right? Thank you very much to our local public library.” – Tim Ulbrich [22:06]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: [00:00:00] Hi there. Tim Ulbrich here and happy new year. I’m so excited to be kicking off 2025 with you here on the YFP podcast. Thank you so much for listening and for joining the show. 

I get excited With the turning of the page into the new year, not as a complete reset, but as an opportunity to really look more closely at the priorities that I’ve determined to be most important to me personally and professionally, and to make sure that the schedule and activities align accordingly.

And I hope the same is true for you. And as we talk about. That turned into the new year as it relates to the financial plan. I’m going to cover five financial moves that I think you should consider implementing as well as why I think about each of these five areas.

So let’s kick things off with number one, which is making sure that our financial goals strike the balance between living a rich life today, as well as. Planning and saving for the future, right? We need to be thinking about tomorrow. We have to be planning and saving for retirement, making sure that we’re focused on moving our net worth in a positive direction, net [00:01:00] worth being our assets minus our liabilities, making sure that we’re taking care of our future selves, saving for retirement, filling those investment buckets.

All of those things are a priority. But let’s not lose sight of those goals that. Help keep us focused on living a rich life today while we’re planning and saving for the future while we’re planning for tomorrow. So perhaps for some of you listening, you’ve long dreamed about a certain experience that has taken a backseat to the busyness of life.

Maybe that’s a small as a weekend getaway for those that have young kids. I know how difficult that can be, or perhaps for some of you, this is a big stretch goal, maybe something as big as a year off traveling the world, having those Lifetime types of experiences, those bucket list type of experiences that are most important to you.

You know, I think back to Matt and Nikki Javid that we featured on the podcast that traveled the world. Nick Ornella that took a year off from his job as a community pharmacist to travel the world. We’ll share both of those episodes in the show notes. So no matter where your experience or goals live, [00:02:00] there is no right or wrong.

Each of us are on our own journey. Perhaps it’s something that’s experienced focus that hasn’t been a priority that you’d like to make a priority those interests or hobbies that we used to long for and prioritize that have gotten lost again in that busyness of life and work.

 One of the activities I wanted to pursue was getting back into playing volleyball, something I had done competitively throughout high school, something that the busyness of life. Other priorities and work just fell by the wayside.

And I did that through a local rec league and that brought incredible joy to me throughout the winter. Or what about that side hustle business or project that you’ve been dragging your feet to take the first step on, or perhaps volunteering or giving opportunities that have gotten lost. And the shuffle, the other priorities of the financial plan.

So let’s make this year, the year that we move the needle on both. Yes, those long term savings and investment goals saving for our future selves, while also prioritizing living a rich life today. 

 So that’s number one on our list of five financial moves that you can make in the new year, all right. [00:03:00] Number two is taking your tax strategy to the next level, taking your tax strategy to the next level.

Now, tax, in my opinion, is one of the most underappreciated and overlooked parts of the financial plan. And I want you to think about tax as a thread. That runs across your financial plan, perhaps one that maybe you’re not thinking enough about that. Ideally we are proactively considering and evaluating when we are making our financial moves.

Now, this sounds so obvious, but I previously have viewed tax very much in the rear view mirror, right? We have to file by April 15th or thereabouts each year to meet the IRS requirements. We don’t want the IRS coming knocking at our doors. And when we do that, we are accounting for. What happened in the previous year now, thankfully, because of our attention and focus on this topic, I’ve become much more proactive in my tax planning as a part of the financial plan, but in years gone by, we would file our taxes and then we’d hold [00:04:00] our breath, right?

Are we going to get a refund? Are we going to have taxes that are due? Did we, withholdings correctly based on differences in charitable giving from one year to the next, right? All of these factors, I didn’t have a great. Picture on come that time of tax filing, what was going to happen, right? And that is less than ideal when it comes to optimizing this part of the financial plan.

And so again, we need to shift our attention from tax preparation to tax planning. One is proactive. One is reactive, right? Again, when we go to file and we complete that paperwork, whether you do that yourself, whether you hire a professional, that is looking backwards. If we start to think more proactive, hopefully at the point of filing, yes, we’re going to do that work.

We have to do that, but we’re then looking ahead to say, Hey, based on that information, based on the rest of our financial plan, based on our personal situation, based on changes that we know are coming or goals that we have. Okay. Bye. What can we be doing strategically in advance throughout the rest of the year to make sure that we’re paying [00:05:00] our fair share of taxes, but no more.

So if you don’t already know your key tax numbers, I’m referring to things like marginal tax rate, effective tax rate, adjusted gross income. Let’s make a commitment this year. We’re going to do it. To get started and to learn more. Now I would love if you would get out the IRS form 10 40, we’ll link to it in the show notes and just spend 10 to 15 minutes to make sure that you understand the terminology and the flow of dollars.

I get it. It’s nerdy, right? And whether you like this subject or you don’t, you do it yourself, you hire someone else, understanding these numbers and understanding the flow of dollars and what those terms mean and how it, ultimately affects your marginal and your effective tax rate is going to be really important as you think about the strategies and you’ll be able to directly see how certain strategies you can implement in the financial plan are going to have an impact on the overall taxes that you pay.

So as one example, AGI adjusted gross income [00:06:00] has huge implications for those that are going through student loan repayment, right? Income driven repayment calculations, especially for those that are pursuing a public service loan forgiveness strategy. Your adjusted gross income is directly tied to the monthly payment that you’re going to make on your student loan.

So if we understand that, we can then start to think about how Well, Hey, are there strategies I can use that can perhaps reduce or lower my AGI adjusted gross income? Not by making less, we don’t want to do that, but by making contributions to things like traditional 401k or traditional 403b accounts, or how about health savings accounts?

Right. These are types of things that can reduce our taxable income, therefore reduce our monthly student loan payment, which is a great thing, especially for those that are pursuing tax free loan forgiveness all the while we’re accruing tax deferred savings into the future, just one example of how.

Important. The proactive planning can be now on episode 309 of the podcast. We’ll link to that in the show notes, CPA Sean [00:07:00] Richards covered the top 10 tax blunders that pharmacists make. 

Some of those things, including having a surprise bill.

Or refund due at filing, probably the most common thing that we see and so what we want to be doing ideally is we’re shooting for zero. We don’t want to have an interest free loan that we have out to the government. And we also don’t want to have a surprise bill that’s due that we’re not ready for.

 Another common mistake he discussed was pharmacists not employing a bunching strategy for charitable giving. So for those that are giving, especially giving at a significant level, uh, and aren’t following the standardized deduction, is there perhaps some strategy in the, in the bunching of charitable contributions that can reduce.

Once tax rate, he also talked about a common mistake. You saw a new side hustlers and business owners not planning for taxes. So earning income and being surprised, uh, by not paying estimated taxes along the way, we talked about underestimating the power of the HSA, the health savings account, and an oldie, but a goodie not factoring in public service loan forgiveness when choosing tax [00:08:00] filing status as married.

filing separately or married filing jointly. So make sure to check out that episode, episode 309 and easy to see as you hear some of those common examples, why having a proactive tax plan is worth its weight in gold. 

 So that’s number two on our list of five financial moves to make in the new year. Number three is button up your financial documents, button up your financial documents.

Now getting organized with your financial records. I believe plays a significant role, not necessarily in terms of moving the needle on your net worth, but in making sure that you and others have access to all of the information that you need to make informed decisions with the financial plan. So think for a minute about all the financial accounts that you have out there, all the different documents.

Insurance policies that touch a certain part of your financial plan. The list quickly grows to one that is overwhelming and the more you operate in your own system, the longer time goes by where you’re operating in [00:09:00] your own system, the easier it is for you to navigate, but perhaps harder for others to navigate and unravel should they need to do so in the future.

And that’s where this concept of buttoning up your financial documents comes in. That’s where this concept of a legacy folder comes in. I first heard of that idea of a legacy folder when I took Dave Ramsey’s financial peace university, probably 10, 12 years ago at this point at our local church. And I remember walking away thinking, wow, that is so simple, so obvious.

Why haven’t I done that yet? Why haven’t Jess and I done that yet as a part of our own plan? So essentially the idea of a legacy folder, if that’s a new concept to you, whether it’s a physical folder, an electronic folder, or a combination of both, it’s a place where you have all of your financial related documents.

So in the event of an emergency, others would be able to quickly access your financial situation. And they’re not just access, but be able to pick up and understand what’s going on and to be able to make key decisions. In your absence. 

[00:10:00] So here’s how we have organized it. Certainly not the only way to do it, but here’s how we have organized it in a combination of Google drive. And a safe at home that has a passwords, all of our passwords stored in a one password account. So we have nine different sections. I’ll describe them briefly.

This sounds overwhelming. It did take a commitment of time to get started. It takes a commitment of time to update, but I will say there’s an incredible feeling of peace. Momentum that comes from having this done. So section one for us is what we refer to as important documents Okay, birth certificates for us for our kids social security cards marriage certificates passports all of these We have in a fireproof safe at home and we have them just referenced Uh, as being there in the electronic version that we share with the financial planning team, as well as share with those that would take care of the boys in the event of our absence.

So that’s section one important document. Section two is all of our insurance policies and information, auto insurance, homeowner’s insurance, umbrella insurance. Health [00:11:00] insurance, long term disability, term life and term life insurance policies for myself, for Jess, for the business, et cetera. Section three is a state planning documents.

So we have a hard copy of these in the safe that have been notarized and electronic version that’s uploaded in the Google drive. So these are things like the revocable trust agreements, healthcare, power of attorney, living will last will. And testament section four is the car titles. Section five is our home ownership documents. So this is the deed to the home, our home equity line of credit, our HELOC information. We have another copy of homeowners insurance policy here, just so it’s all contained in one section. Section six is a summary of our financial accounts, our net worth tracking sheet.

As well as our social security statements. Section seven is our tax returns for personal and business tax returns. Section eight is all of the records related to the business. So a summary of the different entities, legal documents, operating agreements, buy, sell agreements, et cetera. And then section nine is just a miscellaneous.

So [00:12:00] information about utilities and other accounts that don’t fit. In the previous sections again, it takes time to get that started, but it’s something that you can act upon pretty quickly in the new year. And I encourage you to set a, an annual recurring reminder, whether that’s the turn of the new year, perhaps it’s daylight savings time or something else that you just remember to update those documents as needed.

Periodically. All right. So that’s number three in our five financial moves to make in 2024 button up your financial documents. Number four is my favorite. This is the area that I think has moved the needle the most for Jess and I in our financial plan over the last decade or so. And that is automation, making sure that you have a system and ideally a system that is working.

So think of automation as the mechanism by which your income is working for you, and it’s automatically funding the priorities that you’ve already set.

And determined to be most important in advance. Now, I know I’m not alone when [00:13:00] I say that I was feeling for some time that there are multiple financial priorities that are occurring at once that are swirling around in my head. And it can be overwhelming to think about what are those priorities in what order.

And how do we allocate the limited resource of limited income that we have to those? Should we focus on one? Should we focus on two? Should we focus on three? And so much of the stress around the financial plan, I believe is from all of that unknown and anxiety swirling in our heads, right? If we can get that down onto paper.

And if we can start to put some numbers and a plan to it and prioritize it, we may not always like the outcome of how fast we may or may not be able to achieve those goals. But once we have a plan, once we articulate it, once we know we thought about it, we prioritize it. I think there’s a lot of clarity and momentum that can come from that.

So automation helps put those goals into action. It takes the stress out of wondering whether or not they’re going to happen. So whether it’s saving for an emergency fund, whether it’s saving for a vacation, paying down [00:14:00] debt. Whether it’s student loan debt, consumer debt, auto loan debt, mortgage debt, whatever type of debt, whether it’s saving for retirement, saving for a home, saving for investment property, automation helps identify and prioritize these goals and assign your income accordingly.

Yes, it takes a bit of time to set up, perhaps not as much as you may think as you hear about it, but once it’s set up, it provides a long term Return on time benefit, but also better yet, as I mentioned, peace of mind and feeling of momentum, knowing that you’ve thought about prioritize and have a plan in place, working itself to fund your goals.

Now, Ramit said, he talks about this in his book. I will teach you to be rich. He does an incredible job of teaching automation credit to him. And he says that automating your financial plan will be the single most profitable system that you’ll ever build. And I remember hearing that and thinking, man, that’s a big, big promise, right?

But it is a hundred percent true. [00:15:00] Automating your financial plan will be the single most profitable system that you’ll ever build. So if you’re not already doing this, I want you to imagine a future state. Imagine a future state where your financial goals and priorities are clearly defined. You’ve determined how much of your monthly budget is available for these goals, and you have a system in place to automatically fund these goals every month.

So you get paid and your money is being distributed automatically. Paycheck comes in, dollars are being funded to the goals that you’ve already determined and prioritized to be most important. Okay. So what does this look like? Here’s how Jess and I. Are currently implementing this now, previously we adhered to a zero based budget, which I think really did help us.

Laser in and focus on our expenses and account for every single dollar that we earn. That’s the premise of a zero based budget. I think that method works out really well, especially when you’re getting started or feel like you need to get back on track. But over time, we’ve loosened [00:16:00] this up knowing that once we account for all of our monthly commitments, right?

Our monthly commitments being mortgage insurance, property taxes, giving grocery subscriptions, utilities, et cetera. Once we account for those, and those are largely fixed. outside of some variation in utility payments. We have a certain amount of funds after we account for those things that we know can be allocated in two general buckets.

With several options within those two general buckets. So what are those two general buckets? General bucket number one is what we call everything else. So this includes things like gas, miscellaneous trips to the store, family experiences, family entertainment, eating out, et cetera. And we track this, Jess and I track this in a shared Google sheet.

 That just helps us make sure we don’t overspend this category. The second general bucket is what we think of as our sinking funds. It’s the second bucket of funds that we want to predefine, prioritize, set allocation amounts, and then set up auto [00:17:00] contribution of funds.

 The areas that we’re focused on our funding and HSA saving for a summer vacation, our Roth IRAs funding, the next, the next car purchase, and then thinking more about the boys five to nine funds for college savings.

So as we sat down and thought about. What is the greatest priority? Those are the things that rose to the top that we wanted to fund with these bucket two funds that I’m referring to, right? These sinking funds. So in this scenario, and within our discussion of automation, we would look to estimate the available pool of funds per month or per year divided by 12.

We would then prioritize the list. Determine the allocation order in the amounts. And then, as I mentioned, we would automatically fund those and set up an, a recurring contribution. 

Now you can see the system and process that we worked through, right? We identified the total estimated annual amount. You can do the same thing to buy that by 12 for monthly.

We listed out the goals and we matched those up [00:18:00] to prioritize accordingly. Now here’s the disappointing part, or perhaps. Depending on you look at it, maybe exciting as I do in this example, we have fully funded several goals, right? , but we had several things that I mentioned that were left unfunded. Okay. The kids five to nine accounts as well as the next car fund. So we have a couple options here. We can go back to the drawing board and redistribute, right?

Lower some of the other ones and partially fund some, and then have others that we are able to partially fund, or we can stay as is knowing that if additional funds become available, right? Whether that’s in the form of for us, additional income, it could be tax refunds, although hopefully we’re doing a good job planning and that’s not the it could be sizable income for some of you.

It could be picking up extra hours. It could be gifts that you receive, whatever might be the additional income. We know that we have a system and a list that is prioritized, that if that income comes in, we [00:19:00] know exactly Where we’re going to allocate that, and that is the power of automation.

That is the power of having a system. So one step further, what does this practically look like for us in terms of implementation, so we use ally for all of our online banking. Now, this is not a commercial for ally.

Uh, we really like them. We’ve used them for several years. I like the capability they have with saving buckets and other features, but you can build a system like this and many different types of savings accounts. So for us, direct deposit from work income goes into ally, goes into a checking account. And since we know the amount required per month to allocate to the goals we decided upon, there is then a bucket.

Labeled for each of these goals inside of ally. So the transfer of funds goes from checking account where the direct deposit comes in to savings account. And then within the savings account, we have a predefined bucket. So essentially what this looks like is you’ve got a certain amount of dollars, let’s say [00:20:00] 30 or 40 in a savings account.

But once you click into that, you see all of these different sub buckets for things like vacation and again, you can do a multitude of things. Of different buckets. I think you can do up to 30 or so inside of ally. And in the case of for us, the IRA, HSA savings, you know, we could put those in the bucket as well inside the savings account, but we’re going to set those up to be an auto contribution directly into the investment account, right?

We want those dollars working for us as quickly as possible. So again, imagine that flow, you get paid. Right. We’ve identified the buckets. They auto contribute into the buckets because we know we’ve already accounted for inside the budget, and then that’s working for us once we have the system set up now, depending on when you get paid for us, it’s the first of the month, but for you, it might be two times a month.

But regardless, once you know when you get paid and once that consistent, we know that any time after the first, so we get paid around the first of the month as well as the 15th, but we use the first is our metric for when we’re going to auto fund these goals. So anytime [00:21:00] after the first, it could be the third, it could be the fourth.

I think I have most of them set up on the fourth. We can have that auto transfer established to go from checking to savings to the bucket, leaving. Only in checking what is left to pay off the credit card each month. And so that all other dollars, they have a purpose, right? They’re being defined and allocated towards a goal.

That is the system of automation. I think the one probably that can move the needle, the most automate your financial plan, have a system in place.

And finally, number five is set your learning plan. Now, when it comes to personal finance, I believe strongly that there is no arrived with the financial plan. Right? This is constantly evolving. It’s constantly changing and a commitment to ongoing learning and having the humility to understand that there’s much to learn and that mistakes are inevitable is really key to long term success.

One of the greatest advantages of that we have of living in the 21st century is that we have access to learning just about [00:22:00] anything that we want. And often we can do it at a low or no cost, right? Thank you very much to our local public library. So whether it’s reading books, great. Have at it. If it’s podcasts, blogs, videos, there’s many options out there.

Find the learning path that means the most to you and has the significance. And really engages you in the learning process. And I’m going to encourage you. Learn learning is one thing, right? But learning plus action plus accountability is really where things start to happen. So that’s number five of our five financial moves to make set an intentional plan around what you want to learn in this new year.

And then determine what are those resources? What are the blogs? What are the books? What are the podcasts that are going to help you get there? And I hope YFP will be an important part of that journey. Cheers to a great new year. Have a great rest of your day.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 384: Beyond Salary: Negotiating Your Value in the Workplace


YFP Co-Founders Tim Baker and Tim Ulbrich discuss essential negotiation skills inspired by Chris Voss’s book, Never Split The Difference, covering key strategies to boost your financial plan, mindset, and confidence.

Episode Summary

In this episode, YFP Co-Founders Tim Baker and Tim Ulbrich have a valuable conversation on negotiation—an essential skill that impacts not only finances but also mindset and confidence. Inspired by Chris Voss’s book, Never Split The Difference, Tim and Tim explore negotiation techniques drawn from Voss’s experience as a former FBI hostage negotiator and break down why negotiation is vital for your financial plan, key goals, and practical strategies for navigating each step.

About Today’s Guests

Tim Baker is the Co-Founder and Director of Financial Planning at Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 12,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. 

Tim attended the United States Military Academy majoring in International Relations and branching Armor. After his military career, he worked as a logistician with a major retailer and a construction company. After much deliberation, Tim decided to make a pivot in his career and joined a small independent financial planning firm in 2012. In 2016, he launched his own financial planning firm Script Financial and in 2019 merged with Your Financial Pharmacist. Tim now lives in Columbus, Ohio with his wife (Shay), three kids (Olivia, Liam and Zoe), and dog (Benji).

Tim Ulbrich is the Co-Founder and CEO of Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 15,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. To date, YFP has partnered with 75+ organizations to provide personal finance education.

Tim received his Doctor of Pharmacy degree from Ohio Northern University and completed postgraduate residency training at The Ohio State University. He spent 9 years on faculty at Northeast Ohio Medical University prior to joining Ohio State University College of Pharmacy in 2019 as Clinical Professor and Director of the Master’s in Health-System Pharmacy Administration Program.

Tim is the host of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast which has more than 1 million downloads. Tim is also the co-author of Seven Figure Pharmacist: How to Maximize Your Income, Eliminate Debt and Create Wealth. Tim has presented to over 200 pharmacy associations, colleges, and groups on various personal finance topics including debt management, investing, retirement planning, and financial well-being.

Key Points from the Episode

  • Importance of Negotiation in Financial Planning [0:00]
  • Introduction to Negotiation and Its Role in Financial Planning [1:23]
  • The Process and Importance of Negotiation [6:45]
  • Employer Expectations and Employee Responsibilities in Negotiation [13:07]
  • Strategies for Effective Negotiation [17:09]
  • Counteroffers and Leveraging Non-Salary Terms [32:18]
  • Tools and Techniques for Negotiation [37:19]
  • Applying Negotiation Strategies in Financial Planning [46:54]
  • Conclusion and Final Thoughts [47:08]

Episode Highlights

“Negotiation is really a process of discovery. It really shouldn’t be viewed as a battle. It’s really a process of discovery.” – Tim Baker [5:58]

“I think there is often a sentiment and I know I’ve felt it myself, where, you know what, I’m glad to have a position. I’m glad to be making a good income. But that can be true, and you still can be a good person, and you still can negotiate and advocate for yourself and the value you bring to the organization.” – Tim Ulbrich [6:20]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich  00:00

Hey everybody. Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to the Yfp Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. Negotiation. That’s what we’re talking about today, an important skill that many of us were not taught, and one that can move the needle significantly, yes, financially, but also in terms of mindset and confidence. One of my favorite resources on this topic is the book never split the difference by Chris Voss. I first heard this book on a podcast interview several years ago where Chris was demonstrating his quote late night DJ voice, which is one of the fun techniques he describes in that book. Now, if you haven’t read the book before. In addition to listening to today’s episode, check it out and make sure to do the audio version. It’s fantastic and really drives home the examples used throughout. Chris is a former FBI international hostage negotiator who took what he learned from high stakes negotiation and brought it to us for everyday use. Now, considering that effective negotiation can have a big impact on your financial plan. This week, we’re hitting replay on an episode that Tim and I recorded back in August of 2020 during the show, we discussed why negotiation is important your financial plan, the goals of negotiation and tips and strategies for different parts of the negotiation process that you can implement in your own negotiation. Make sure to listen all the way through as I’m confident in saying, there will be a positive return on your time investment. One last thing, unlike traditional financial planning firms, our team of certified financial planners at Yfp is experience in helping our clients through negotiations, whether that be negotiating within an organization for a new position or to increase salary or for someone looking for a new job, if we can help with your negotiation, head on over your financial pharmacist.com click on book a discovery call so that we can learn more about your situation and see whether or not our services are the right fit for You. All right, let’s jump into our conversation on effective negotiation. Tim Baker, welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker  02:08

Yeah, happy to be here. How’s it going?

Tim Ulbrich  02:09

Tim, it’s going excited to talk negotiation something we discuss a lot, a lot in presentations, a lot. I know that you discuss with clients as a part of the financial plan, but we haven’t addressed it directly on the show before. So I’m excited that we get a chance to dig into this topic. And we know that negotiation can carry a lot of power, and can be used across the board, really, in life, right? Could be negotiating terms for a new or existing job, position, buying a car, buying a house, negotiating with your kids or spouse, kidding, not not kidding, as we’ll talk about here in a little bit, so we’re going to focus predominantly on salary negotiation, but really, these techniques can be applied to many areas of the financial plan and really life as a whole. So Tim, I know that for you, negotiation is a key piece of the financial plan, and you and our CFPs over at Yfp talk about negotiation in the context of financial planning, which I would say is probably not the norm of the financial planning industry and services. So let’s start with this. Why is negotiation such an important piece of the financial plan?

Tim Baker  03:14

Yeah, so I think you know, if we, if we look at why, if peace mission, you know why? If he’s mission is to empower pharmacists to achieve financial freedom. So I think the building blocks of that really is kind of what we do day in and day out with with clients at Yfp plan. And what I what I typically, or the way that we typically approach a financial plan, is we really want to help the client grow and protect their income, which is the lifeblood of the financial plan. Without income, nothing moves. But we know that probably more importantly than that is grow and protect the balance sheet, the net worth, which means increase in assets efficiently and decrease in liabilities efficiently and ultimately moving the net worth number in the right direction. So those are, you know, both quantitative things, but then qualitatively, we want to make sure that we’re keeping all the goals in mind. So grow and protect income and net worth while keep the goals in mind. So to me, that’s, that’s our jam, you know. So you know when I when I say, you know, when somebody asked me a question, like we do the ask a wife, pcfp, and I’m like, I always say, Well, it depends. A lot of it depends, really, on those, those foundational like, where are we at with the balance sheet, and where do we want to go? Meaning, what? What are our goals? What’s our why? What’s a, what’s the life plan? You know, what’s a wealthy life for you? And how can we support that with the financial plan? So to go back to your question, you know, my belief is that the income is a is a big part of that. And you know, what I found with working with many, many pharmacists is sometimes, and sometimes pharmacists are not just, you know, not great at advocating for themselves. You know, most of the people that I talk to, you know, when we talk about salary negotiation, they’re like, um. You know, I just thankful I have a job, and I’m in agreement with that. But, you know, sometimes a little bit of negotiation and having some of the skills that we’ll talk about today to better advocate for yourself is is important, and it’s in a lot of this stuff is not necessarily just for salary. It can be for a lot of different things. But to me, what I what I saw as a need here. You know, same thing, like most financial planners don’t walk, walk you through kind of home purchase and what that looks like, because most financial planners are working with people in their 50s, 60s and 70s. So a lot that was a need for a lot of our clients were like, Hey, Tim, I’m buying this house. I don’t really know where to start. So we, we, you know, provide some education and some recommendations and advice around that. So same thing with salary. It’s like I kept seeing like, well, maybe, you know, maybe I, you know, I took the job too quickly, or, you know, I didn’t advocate for myself. So that’s really where we want to provide some education and advice, again, to have a better, better position from it, from an income, income perspective, yeah. 

Tim Ulbrich  05:58

I think it’s a great tool to have in your tool bag, you know? And I think, as we’ll talk about here, you know, the goal is not to be an expert negotiator. There’s lots of resources that are out there that can help with this and make it tangible and practical, one of which will draw a lot of the information today. I know that you talk with clients, a resource I love, never split the difference by Chris Voss, but I’m glad you mentioned. You know, I think there is often a sentiment. I know I felt it myself, where, you know what, I’m glad to have a position. I’m glad to be making a good income. But that can be true, and you still can be a good person, and you still can negotiate and advocate for yourself and the value you bring to the organization. Yeah, so I hope folks will hear that and not, not necessarily think that negotiation is bad, and as we’ll talk about here in a moment, I think really can have a significant impact when you think about it as it relates to earnings over your career and what those additional earnings could mean. So Tim, break it down for us. What is negotiation? And really thinking further, why is it important?

Tim Baker  06:57

Yeah, so, so negotiation, you know, it’s really a process of discovery. You know, it really shouldn’t be viewed as as a battle. It’s really a process of discovery. It’s kind of that awkward conversation that you’re you should be obligated to have, because, you know, if you, you know, if you don’t want to advocate for yourself professionally, who will, and maybe you have a good mentor or something like that. But to me, the the negotiation again, is really to discover, you know, what, what you want, and kind of what you’re the counterpart you know, which might be a boss or a hiring manager or something like that. And it’s an it’s really important, because, you know, settling for a lower salary can have really major financial consequences, both both immediately and down the road. And you know, you you typically raises that you receive are typically based on a percentage of their salary. So we’re, hey, we’re going to give you a, you know, 3% raises here, a 5% raise if you start off with a salary that you’re not happy with. You know that then obviously, that’s, that’s a problem. Accrue less in retirement savings. So that TSP, that 401, K, 403, B, again, you typically are going to get some type of match in a lot of cases, and then you’re going to put a percent in. So again, that could potentially be lower, but it’s, it is. It’s not just about salary. It can be, you know, I think another mistake that sometimes people make is that they’ll say, oh, wow, I was making, you know, 125 and, you know, I’m taking a job that’s paying me 135 and they take a major step back on some of the non salary, things like benefits and flex scheduling and time off and things like that. But you know, you really want to make sure that the compensation package that you have, you know you’re happy with, because being overpaid, being underpaid, really can make you feel resentful over the long run. So you want to make sure that you’re, you know, again, you know, right now, we’re filming this in the midst of a pandemic, and you know the economy and the job market is tough, but you know, you still want to, you still want to advocate for yourself and make sure you’re getting the, you know, the best compensation package that that you can.

Tim Ulbrich  08:56

As we’ll talk about here in a little bit, I think If we frame this differently than maybe our understanding or preconceived beliefs. You know, you mentioned it’s not a battle, you know. I think the goal is that you’re trying to come to an agreement or an understanding. And as we’ll talk about here, many employers are likely expecting this, and that number, in terms of those that are expecting versus those that are actually engaging in the conversation, from an employee standpoint, is very different. So I think that might help give us confidence to be able to initiate some of those. And we’ll talk about strategies to do that. I do want to give one example, though. Tim, real quick, you mentioned, you know, obviously, if somebody earns less and they receive smaller raises, or they accrue less in retirement savings, that can have a significant impact. And and I went down the rabbit hole, prepping for this episode of just looking at a quick example of this, where you have two folks that, let’s say they both start working at the age of 28 they retire at their 65 so same starting point, same retirement age. Let’s assume they get a 3% cost of living adjustment every year for their career. Just to keep it simple, you. The only difference here is that one starts at 100k and one starts at 105k so because of either you know what, what they asked for negotiations, whatever be the case, one starts $5,000 greater than the other. And if you play this out, same starting age, same ending age, same cost of living adjustments, one starts at a higher point when it’s all said and done, one individual has about $300,000 more of earnings than the other. And this, of course, does not include differences that you’d also have, because a higher salary, if you have a match, that would increase, that would compound, that would grow, if you were to switch jobs, you’re at a better point of now negotiating from a higher salary. All other benefits that aren’t included. But the significance of the starting point, I think, is something to really look at those numbers that often where you start can inform where you’re going, not only from cost of living adjustments, but also future employment, right? So we know that where you start, if you get a 3% raise, it’s of course, gonna be based off that number. You decide to leave that employer and you go to another one, what do they ask you? How much did you make? You’re using that number. So that starting point is so critical, and I hope that new practitioners might even find some confidence in that, to be able to engage in discussions knowing how significant those numbers can be over a career. So in that one example, that starting point is a difference of about $300,000 Crazy, right? 

Tim Baker  11:24

When you look at over a long time period, yeah, it’s not, it’s nuts. And I’d pay the devil’s advocate, you know, on the other side of that is that, you know, again, so much, just like everything else with with the financial plan, you can’t look at it, you know, in a vacuum, we’ve had clients, yeah, take a lot less money, and really was because of the the student loans, and how that would affect their strategy in terms of forgiveness and things like that. So, yeah, it is multifactorial. It’s definitely something that it should really be examined. And I think again, when you look at the overall context of the financial plan, but it to your point, Tim, that that start in salary, and really you know how you negotiate throughout the course of your career is going to be utterly important. And you know, again, what we say is, with, you know, we, we kind of downplay the income, because I think, you know, so much of what’s kind of taught us, like, oh, six figure salary, you’re you’ll be okay. And that’s not true. But then, you know it is true that it is the lifeblood of the financial plan. So I think if you have a plan and you’re intentional with what you’re doing, that’s where you can really start, you know, making moves with regard to your financial outlook,

Tim Ulbrich  12:26

yeah, and I’m glad you know you said that about salary shouldn’t be looked at in a silo. I mean, just to further that point, you you’ve alluded to it already, these numbers don’t matter. If there’s other variables that are non monetary that matter more, right? Whether that be time off or satisfaction in the workplace, opportunities that you have feelings that will come. I mean, the whole list of things that you can’t necessarily put a number to. I mean, I would argue if, if those are really important, you’ve got to weigh those against, you know, whatever this number would be, and there’s a certain point where the difference in money is it worth it? You know, if there’s other variables that are involved, which, which, usually there are, hopefully we can get both right salary and and non salary items. Yes. So interesting stats about negotiation. I’ve heard you present before on this topic, but I’d like you to share with our audience in terms of managers that are expecting hires to negotiate, versus those that do talk us through some of those as I think it will help us frame and maybe change our perception on employers expecting it and our willingness to engage in these conversations.

Tim Baker  13:34

Yeah, and I really need to cite, to cite this one. And I believe, I believe this first stat comes from Sherm, which is the Society for Human Resource Management. So I think this is, like the biggest association for, like HR and human resource personnel in the country. And the stat that that I use is that, you know, 99% of hiring managers expect prospective hires to negotiate. So if you think about that, you know, and you know, the overwhelming majority expect, you know, you the perspective hire to negotiate, and they build their initial offers as such. So, you know, the example, you know, I did the clients, is like, hey, you know, we have, you know, we have a position that we could pay, you anywhere from you know, 110,000 to 130,000 knowing that you know, Tim, if I’m offering this job to you, knowing that you’re probably going to negotiate with me, I’m going to offer it to you for 110 knowing that I have a little bit of wiggle room if you kind of come back with a counter offer. But what a lot of a lot of my clients, you know, or people do that I talk with is they’ll just say, Yes, I found a job. Crappy, crappy job market, you know, happy to get started, ready to get started. And there’s and they’re, they’re either, you know, overly enthusiastic to accept a job, or they’re just afraid that a little bit of negotiation would would, you know, hurt their, yeah, you know, hurt their outlook. So. So with that in mind is that you, you know the the offers, I think, are built in a way that you know you should, you should be negotiating and trying to, again, advocate for yourself.

Tim Ulbrich  15:09

Yeah, and so if people are presenting positions often, you know, with with a range and salary, expecting negotiation, I hope that gives folks, you know, some confidence and okay, that’s probably expected, and maybe shift some of the perception away from this whole thing could fall apart, which it could right at any given point in time, especially depending on the way you conduct yourself in that negotiation, which I think is really, really important to consider. But I think what we want to try to avoid, Tim, back to a comment you made earlier, is any resentment, right as well. I mean, if we think about this from a relationship standpoint. We want the employee to feel valued, and we want the employer to have a shot at retaining this individual long term, right? So it’s a two way, two way relationship,

Tim Baker  15:50

And it kind of, it kind of comes up to where, you know, we were talking about, what is, you know, what is the goal of negotiation? And really, the goal of negotiation is, is to come to some type of agreement. Yeah, the problem, the problem with that is, is that people are involved in this, and we as people are emotional beings. So if we feel like that, we’re being, you know, we’re treated unfairly, or we don’t feel safe and secure, or if we’re not in control of the conversation, you know, our emotions can get the best of us. So that’s that’s that’s important. So there again, there’s some techniques that you can, you know, utilize to kind of mitigate that. But you know, to allude to your point about, you know, negotiating the fear to kind of, you know, potentially mess up the deal. You know, there’s a stat that says 32% don’t negotiate because they’re too worried about losing the job offer. Yeah, I know Tim, like we can attest to this, because, you know, with our growth at Yfp, we’ve, we’ve definitely done some, some human resource in use that as a verb, and hiring and things like that of late. And I gotta say that, you know, the I think that some of this can be unfounded, just because there’s, there’s just so much, you know, blood, sweat and tears that goes into fire, you know, to fight finding the right people, to kind of surround, you know, yourself with, and bring into an organization that, to me, a little bit of back and forth is not going to ultimately lose the job. So typically, most, most jobs, there’s, you know, interview, you know, obviously there’s, there’s an application process, there’s interviews, there’s second interviews, there’s maybe on site visits, there’s kind of, you know, looking at all the candidates and then extending offers. If you get to that, that offer stage, you’re, you’re you’re pretty, you know, they’ve identified you as they’re the, you’re the person that they want. So, you know, sometimes a little bit of back and forth is not going to, you know, derail any such deal. So that’s, it’s really, really important to understand that, yeah, and

Tim Ulbrich  17:45

As the employer, I mean, we’ve all heard about the costs and statistics around retention. So as an employer, when I find that person, I want to retain them. That’s my that’s my goal. Right now, I want to find good talent on a retain good talent. So I certainly don’t want somebody being resentful about, you know, the work that they’re doing, the pay that they have. And so I think if we can work some of that out before beginning and come to an agreement, it’s a good fit for us, good fit for them, I think it’s also going to help the benefit of the, hopefully the long term relationship of that engagement. So it’s one thing to say, we should be doing it. It’s another thing to say, Well, how do we actually do this? Well, you know, what are some tips and tricks for negotiation? So I thought it’d be helpful if we could walk through some of the stages of negotiation, and through those stages we can talk as well as beyond that, what are some actual strategies to negotiation? Again, another shout out to never split the difference by Chris Voss. I think he does an awesome job of teaching these strategies in a way that really helped them come alive and are in our memorable Yeah. So, Tim, let’s talk about the the first stage, the interview stage, and what are some strategies that that those listening can take when it comes to negotiation in this stage.

Tim Baker  18:56

Yeah? So, so I kind of, when I, when I present, you know, these concepts to a client. I kind of said that the, you know, the four stages of the of negotiation are fairly, are fairly vanilla, you know. And the first one is the, you know, that interview. So when you get that interview, you know, what I say is, you know, typically you want to talk, talk less, listen more and learn more. Typically, the person that is talking the most is, is, is not in control. The conversation, the one that’s listening and answering, asking good questions, is in control. And I kind of, I kind of think back to, you know, some of our recent hires, and, you know, the people that we identify as, like, top candidates, I’m like, Man, their interviews went really well. And when I actually think, think back and slow down, it’s, it’s really, I think that they went really well, because there’s, it’s really that person asking good questions, and then, and then me just talking, and and, and that’s, and that’s like the perception, so in that, in that case, like the, you know, the candidate was asking us good questions, and we’re like, yeah, these, this was a great interview, because I’d like to hear myself talk, or I just get really excited. About, you know, what we’re doing at Yfp. So I think if you can really, you know, focus on your counterpart, focus on the organization, you know, whether it’s the hospital or whatever, whatever it is, and learn, and then the, you know, and then really pivot to the value that you bring. I think that’s going to be important, you know, most important. So, you know, understanding, you know, what, what some of their maybe pain points are, whether it’s retention or, you know, maybe some type of, you know, care issue, or whatever that may be, you know, you can kind of use that to your advantage as you’re as you’re kind of going through the different, you know, stages of negotiation, but the more that the other person talks, you know, the better. I would say, you know, in the interview stage, you know, one of the things that often comes up, you know, that can come off fairly soon, is the question about salary. And, you know, sometimes that is, you know, it’s kind of like a time saving. So it’s a Hey, Tim, you know, what are you looking for in salary? If you throw out a number that’s way too high, like, I’m not even gonna, you know, waste my time. And what I tell clients is, like you typically, you want to, and we’ll talk about anchoring. You really want to, do? You really want to avoid, you know, throwing, throwing a number out and for a variety of reasons. So one of the deflections you could use is, hey, I appreciate the question, but I’m really trying to figure out if I’d be a good fit for your organization. You know, we let’s talk about, you know, negotiate, or let’s talk about salary when the time comes. Or the other, the other piece of it is, it’s just, you are not, you’re not in the business of offering yourself a job. And what I mean by that is it’s, it’s their job to basically provide an offer. So, you know, hey, my current employer, you know, doesn’t really allow me to kind of reveal that kind of information. What did you have in mind? Or we know that pharmacy is a small business, and I’m sure your budget is, you know, is reasonable. What did you have in mind? So at the end of the day, it’s, it’s their job to extend the offer, not you, to kind of negotiate your against yourself, which can happen, you know, I had a, I had a, we signed on a client here at Yfp planning yesterday, and we were talking about negotiation. I think it was kind of had to do with that tax issue. And, you know, he he basically said this is what he was looking for. And then when he got into the organization, I think he saw the number that was budgeted for, and it was a lot more so. Again, if you can deflect that, and I tell a story, when I first got out of the army, I kind of knew this. But when I first got out of the army, I was interviewing for jobs, you know, I was in an interview, and I deflect it. And I think the guy asked me again, and I deflect it. I think he asked me for, like, maybe that asked me for like, four times, and I just wound up giving him a range that was, like, obnoxious, 100 to 200,000 or something like that. But to me, you know, that in the interview didn’t go, go well after that. But to me, it was, like, it was more about, you know, clearing the slate instead of actually learning more about me and seeing if I was a good fit. So you never want to lie about your current style. If they ask about your current style, you never want to lie, but you definitely want to deflect and move to things of like, okay, can I potentially be a good fit for your organization? And then go from there? Yeah. And

Tim Ulbrich  22:55

I think deflection takes practice, right? I don’t think that comes down to many of us. Totally, yeah. Yeah, this, this reminds me. So, you know, talk less, listen more for for any Hamilton folks we have out there, which is playing 24/7 in my house these days, the soundtrack, I’m not gonna, I’m not gonna sing right now, but talk less. Smile, smile more. Don’t let them know what you’re against or what you’re for. So I think that’s a good, good connection there to the interview stage. So next, hopefully comes the good news. Company wants to hire you makes an offer. So Tim, talk us through this stage. What? What should we be remembering when we actually have an offer on the table? Yeah, so

Tim Baker  23:30

I think you definitely want to be appreciative and thankful again when, when a company gets to a point where they’re extending you an offer, that’s, that’s, that’s huge. I remember when I got, again, my first offer out of out of the Army, because, again, you don’t really have a choice when you’re in the army. Well, I guess you do have a choice, but you know, they’re not like, here’s a here’s a written offer for your employment in this platoon somewhere in Iraq. But I remember getting the first offer. I’m like, Man, this is awesome. Shows your salary and the benefits and things like that. So you want to be appreciable and thankful you don’t appreciative and thankful. You don’t want to be you want to be excited, but not too over excited. So you don’t want to appear to be desperate. What I tell clients, I think the biggest piece here is make sure you get it in, write in, yes, and I have a, you know, a story that I tell him, because if it’s not in writing and what essentially says it didn’t, didn’t happen. So again, using some personal experience here, you know, first job out of the army, I had negotiated, you know, basically an extra week of vacation because I didn’t want to take a step back in that regard. And I got the offer, and the extra week wasn’t there. So I talked to my, my, you know, my future boss, about it, and he said, You know what, I don’t want to go back to headquarters and, you know, in ruffle some feathers. So why don’t we just take care of that on site here, and this was the job I had in Columbus, Ohio. And I said, Yeah, okay, I don’t really want to, you know, ruffle feathers either. The problem with that was when he got replaced, when he was terminated, eight months later, that currency burned up fairly quickly. Be so I didn’t have that, you know, that that extra week of vacation. So, you know, if it’s not written down, it never happens. So you want to make sure that, you know, you get it in, right in, and really go over that written offer extensively. So some employers, they’ll, they’ll extend an offer, and they want to, you know, a decision right away. I would walk away from that, you know, to me, a job change, or, you know, something of that magnitude, you know, I think warrants a 24 if not a 48 probably a minimum of 48 hour, you know, time frame for for you to kind of mold over and this is typically where I kind of, I come in and help clients, because they’ll say, Hey, Tim, I got this offer. What do you think? And we go through it, and we look at benefits, and we look at, you know, the total compensation package and things like that. But, you know, you want to, you know, ask for, you know, ask for a time, you know, some time to review everything and then agreed, you know, definitely adhere to the agree, agreed upon deadline to basically provide, you know, an answer or counteroffer, or, you know, whatever, whatever the next step is for you.

Tim Ulbrich  26:01

Yeah, and I think too, the advice to get it in writing helps buy you time. You know, I think you asked for it anyways. And I think the way you approach this conversation, you’re setting up the counter offer, right? So the tone that you’re using, it’s not about being arrogant here. It’s not about, you know, acting like you’re not excited at all. I think you can strike that balance between you’re appreciative, you’re thankful. You know, you’re continuing to assess if it’s a good fit for you and the organization you want. Some time you want it in writing, and you’re beginning to set the stage. And I think human behavior, right? Says if, if, if something is either on the table or pulled away slightly, the other party wants it a little bit more, right? So yes, if I’m the employer, and I really want someone, and I’m all excited about the offer, and I’m hoping they’re gonna say yes, and they say, Hey, I’m really, really thankful for the offer. I’m excited about what you guys are doing. I need some time to think about X, Y and Z, or, you know, I’m really thinking through X, Y or Z, like, all of a sudden, that makes me want them more, you know. So I think there’s, there’s value in in setting up, what is that, that counter offer? So talk to us about the counteroffer. Tim, break it down in some strategies to think about in this portion. Yeah.

Tim Baker  27:10

So, you know, the the counter offer is, I would say, you know, the majority of the time you should counter in some way. I think you’re expected to make a counter. And again, we kind of back that up with some stats. But you also, you need to know when, you know when not to kind of continue to go back to negotiating table, or when, when you’re asking or over asking. So, you know, I think research is going to be a good, you know, part of that, and I, what I tell clients is like, I can give them a very nice, non scientific I’ve worked with so many pharmacists that I can kind of say, oh, that sounds low, you know, in this for community pharmacy or industry, or whatever, you know, hospital in this area. So, you know, it’s, it’s, it’s your network, which could be someone like me, it could be a call, you know, colleagues. But it could also be things like Glassdoor, indeed, salary.com, so you want to make sure that your, you know, your offer, your counter offer, it is backed up in some type of, you know, fact, and really, you know knowing how to maximize your leverage. So if you are you know if you do receive more than one substantial offer, you know, you know from multiple employers, negotiating may be appropriate if the two positions are comparable and then, or if you have tangible evidence that the salary is too low, you know you have a strong position to negotiate. So I had a client that knew that new, newly hired pharmacists were being paid more than than she was, and she, you know, she had the evidence to show that. And basically they went back and did a nice adjustment. So, but again, I think as you go through the way that we kind of do this, you know, with clients, is we kind of go through the the entire letter, and, you know, the benefits and and I basically just highlight things and have questions about, you know, match or vacation time or salary and things like that. And then we start constructing it from there. So if you look at again, the thing where most people will start a salary is, you know, you really want to give. When you counter, you really want to give a salary range, rather than, like a number. So what I say is, if, a if, if, if, if you say, Hey, Tim, I really want to make $100,000 I kind of said it’s almost like the big bad wolf that blows the house down like all those zeros is, it’s not, it’s there’s no substance to that. But if you said, Hey, I really want to make $105,985 the the Journal of experimental social psychology says that using a precise number instead of a rounded number gives it a more potent anchor. So your homework, right? Yeah, you know, you know what you what, you know, what you’re worth, you know, what the positions worth? It’s given the appearance of research. So I kind of like, you know, it’s kind of like the gap the Zach Galifianakis, me, that has all the equations that are flowing. It’s kind of like that. But the the $100,000 you can just blow that house over. So, and I think so. So once you figure out that number, then you kind of want to. Change it so, you know, they say, if you give a range of, you know, you know, of a salary, then it opens up room for discussion, and shows the employer that you have flexibility, and it gives you some cushion. In case, you know, you think that you’re asking for a little bit too high so that’s, that’s going to be, that’s going to be really, really important is, is that to provide kind of precise numbers in in a range, and, oh, by the way, I want to be kind of paid at the upper, upper echelon of that. So

Tim Ulbrich  30:28

real quick on that you mentioned before, the concept of anchoring. I want to spend some time here as you’re talking about a range. So dig into that further. What that means in terms of, if I’m given a range, how does anchoring fit into that. Yeah.

Tim Baker  30:41

So, you know, we kind of talk about this more more when we kind of talk some about the tools and the behavior of negotiation, but the rain. So when we talk about, like anchoring, so anchoring is actually it’s a bias. So anchor and bias describes the common tendency to give too much weight to the first number. So again, if we’re, if we if we can, if I can, if can, have invite the listener to imagine an equation, and the equation is five times four times three times two times one, and that’s in your mind’s eye. And then you clear the slate, and now you imagine this equation one times two times three times four times five. Now, if I show the average person, and I just flash that number up, the first number that start, you know the first equation that starts with five and the second equation that starts with one, we know that those things equal, the same thing, but in the first equation, we see the five first. So it creates this anchor, creates this belief in us that that number is actually higher. Yeah. So, so the the idea of anchoring is typically that that number that we see really is a has a major influence. That first number is a major influence of where the negotiation goes. So you can kind of get into the whole idea of you know, factor in your knowledge of the zone of possible agreement, which is often called Zopa. So that’s the range of options that should be acceptable for both sides, and then kind of assessing, you know, your side of that, and then your your other parties anchor on that. So there’s, there’s lots of things that kind of going into anchoring, but you know, we, you know, we did this recently with a with a client, where I think they were offered somewhere in like the 110 112 area. And she’s like, you know, I really want to get paid closer to, like 117 118 so we, we basically in the counter offer. We said, hey, you know that, thanks for the offer. And we did something called an accusation on it, which we can talk about in a second. But thanks for the counter offer. But, you know, I’m really looking to make between, you know, I think we said something like 116 five, you know, 98 to, you know, all the way up into the 120s and it actually brought her up to, I think she was just 117 change actually brought her up closer to that 18. So using that range and kind of that, that range as an as a good anchoring position to help, help the negotiation. So there’s lots of different things that kind of go into anchor, in terms of extreme anchoring, and a lot of that stuff that they talk about in the book. But again, that’s kind of goes back to that first number being thrown out there can be really, really integral. And again, when you couple that on top of, hey, it’s, it’s their job to make you an offer, not the, not the other way around. You have to really learn how to deflect that and and know you know how to position, you know, position yourself in those negotiations. But that’s really the counteroffer. And what I would say to kind of just wrap up the counter offer is embrace the silence. Yeah, so Tim, there’s silence there. And I’m like, I want to, I want to feel the voice. And I do this with with clients, when we talk about, like mirroring and things like that, like people are uncomfortable with silence. And you know what he talks about in the book, which I would 100% this is really kind of a tip of the cat to Chris Voss in his book, which I love, I read probably at least once a year, where he talks about embracing the silence. We as people are conditioned to feel silences. So you know, he talks about sometimes people will, you know, negotiate against themselves. If you just sit there and you say, Uh huh, that’s interesting. And then in the in the counters, just be pleasantly persistent on the non salary terms, which can be both subjective and objective in terms of what you’re looking for in that position, yeah. And I

Tim Ulbrich  34:19

want to make sure we don’t lose that. You know, we’re talking a lot about salary. But again, as we mentioned at the beginning, really try to not only understand but but fit what’s the value of those non salary terms. So this could be everything from, you know, paid time off to, obviously, other benefits, whether that be health or retirement. This, of course, could be called culture of the organization, whether it’s that specific site, the broader organization, opportunities for mentorship.

Tim Baker  34:48

Yep, mentorship, yes, yes, all that. 

Tim Ulbrich  34:51

I think what you hear from folks, I know I felt in my own personal career, with each year that goes on, I value salary, but salary means less than those other. Things mean more. And so as you’re looking at, let’s just say two offers is one example. Let’s say they’re 5000 apart. Like, I’m not saying you give on salary, but how do you factor in these other variables?

Tim Baker  35:10

Yeah, well, and I think too, and I’ll this is kind of, you know, kind of next level with this. And I’ll give you some examples to cite it. I think another, thing to potentially do when you when you are countering and when you’re shifting to some of the maybe the non salary stuff is really took a hard look at your potential employer, or even your current employer, if this is a you know, if you’re an incumbent and you’re and you’re being reviewed and you’re just advocated for a better compensation package, is look at the company’s mission and values. Yeah. So the example I give is like, when we, when we, when Shay and I got pregnant with Liam, you know, she didn’t, she didn’t have a, you know, a maternity leave benefit, and when she was being reviewed, we kind of, you know, invoked the company. And I think it’s like work life balance and things like that. And we’re like, Well, how can you say that and not back that up? And again, we do it. We did it tactfully. And because you’re almost like, you’re almost like, negotiating against yourself, right? So I present this to clients like the Spider Man meme, whether you know, two spider mans are pointing at each other, and she was able to negotiate a better you know, I’m attorney, and it actually, and you we look at us, you know? And I, you know, I give these, one of our values is encourage growth and development, you know. So if an employee says, Hey, and they make a case that I really want to do this, and, you know, it’s almost like we’re negotiating against ourselves. So I think, if you can one, I think it shows, again, the the research and that you’re really interested and plugged into what the organization is doing. But then I think you, you’re, you’re leveraging the the company against itself in some ways, because you’re almost, you know, negotiating against, well, yeah, we put these on the wall as something that we believe in, but we’re not going to support it. Or, you know, so or, you know, at the very least, it plants a seed, right? And that’s what I that’s what I say sometimes with clients, you know, we do strike out. We don’t, you know, it’s like, it’s, it is hard to move the needle and sometimes, but at least one, we’ve got an iteration under our belts where we are negotiation. And two, we’ve planted a seed with that employer, you know, assuming that they took the job anyway, that says, Okay, these are things that are kind of important to me that we’re going to talk about again when we get and things like that. So I think that’s huge.

Tim Ulbrich  37:18

Good stuff. So let’s talk about some tools that we can use for negotiation, and again, many of these are covered in more detail in the book and other resources, which we’ll link to in the show notes. I just want to hit on a few of these. Let’s talk about mirroring accusation audits and the importance of getting a that’s right while you’re in these conversations. And we’ll leave our listeners to dig deeper in some of the other areas. So talk to us about mirroring. What is it? And kind of give us the example and strategies of mirroring.

Tim Baker  37:49

Yeah. And I would actually, Tim, what I would do is I would actually back up, because I think one of the, I think probably one of the most important tools that that are there, I think, is, is the calibrated questions. That’s one of the first things that he talked Yeah. And the reason so, what is a calibrated question? So a calibrated question is a question with really no fixed answer that gives the illusion of control. So the answer, however, is kind of constrained by that question, and you, the person that’s asking the question, has control of the conversation. So I give the example. You know, when we, when we moved into our our house after we renovated it. So brand new house, I walk into my daughter’s room. I think it was four. She was four at the time, and she’s coloring on the the wall in red, red, red crown. And I’m from, I’m from Jersey. So I say crown, not crayon. So she’s, and I, and I look at her, and I say, Olivia, why are, why are you doing that? And she sees how, like, upset I am and mad, or, you know, and she just starts crying. And there’s no there’s no negotiation from there. There’s negotiation over if, there’s no exchange of information. So in an alternate reality, in an alternate reality, what I should have done instead. Olivia, what? What caused you to do that? So you’re basically blasting instead of why is, why is very accusatory. You’re like, you know, the how and the what questions are good so, and of course, she would say, well, Daddy, I ran out of paper, so the walls the next best thing. So the use of, the use of, and having these calibrated questions in your back pocket, I think, again, buys you some time. And really, I think, frames the conversation with your counterpart well. So using words like how and what, and avoiding things like why, when, who, so you know, what about this works. Doesn’t work for you. How can we make this better for us? How you know? How do you want to proceed? How can we solve this problem? What’s the biggest challenge you face? These are all how does this look to you? These are all calibrated questions that again, as you’re kind of going back and forth, you can kind of lean on so have good how and what questions to kind of answer the question about mirroring. As you’re asking these questions, you’re mirroring. Counterpart. So what mirror in the scientific term is called ISO praxism, but he defines this as the Real Life Jedi mind trick. This causes vomiting of information, is what he says. So you know, these are not the droids you’re looking for. So what, what you essentially do is you, you repeat back the last one to three words, or the critical words of your counterpart sentence, your counterpart sentence. So this is me mirroring myself. Yeah. Well, you want to repeat back because you want to, you want them to reveal more information, and you want to build rapport and have that curiosity of kind of what is, what is the other person thinking? So you can again, come to come to an agreement, come to an agreement. Yeah. So you at the end of the day, the purpose. So this is mirror, and so I’ll show you a funny story. The you know, I do. I practice this on my wife, sometimes who does not have a problem speaking, but sometimes with counterpoint listening, by the way. Yeah, yeah, exactly. So I’ll probably be in trouble. But so I basically just, you know, for the you know, for conversation, just just mirror back exactly what she’s saying. And you can do this physically. You can cross your legs or your arms, or, you know, whatever that looks like, but, but when he talks about more is with words, and, you know, I’ll basically just mirror back my wife and she, at the end of the conversation, she’ll say something like, Man, I feel like you really, like, listen to me. And I laugh about that, because I’m just really repeating back. But if you think about it, I did, because for you to be able to do that, you really do have to listen so, so mirroring again, if you’re just repeating back, you really start to uncover more of what your counterpart is thinking. Because often, like, what comes out of our mouth, you know, the first or even second time is just smoke, you know, so really uncovering that one of the things he talks about is, you know, is labeling where, you know, this is kind of described as the method of validating one’s emotion by acknowledging it. So it’s, it seems like you’re really concerned about patient care. It seems like you’re really concerned about the organization’s retention of talent. So what you’re doing is that you’re using neutral statements that don’t involve the use of I or we, so it’s not necessarily accusatory, and then you are, you know, same with the same with the mirror. You really want to not step on your mirror. You want to not step on your label and really invite the other person to say, Yeah, I’m just really frustrated by this or that. So labeling is really important to basically diffuse the power then the negative emotion and really allow you to remain neutral and kind of find out more about that. So that’s super important, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich  42:39

And I think with both of those, Tim, as you’re talking, it connects well back to what we, we mentioned earlier, of of talk less, listen more like you’re Yeah, you’re really getting more information out, right from from a situation that can be guarded. You know, people are trying to be guarded. And I think more information could lead, hopefully, to a more fruitful negotiation. What about the accusation audit?

Tim Baker  42:59

Yeah. So the accusation audit is, um, is it’s one of my favorites. Kind of same, same with calibrated questions. I typically will tell clients, I’m like, Hey, if you don’t, you know, if you don’t learn anything from this, I would say, have some calibrated questions in your back pocket and have a good accusation audit at the Reddit at the ready. And we typically would, typically will use the accusation audit to kind of frame up a counter offer. So, you know, it kind of, it kind of, so, so what? Before I give you the example, the accusation audit is a technique that’s used to identify and labor label, probably like, the worst thing that your counterpart could say about it. So these, this is all the, like, the head trash that’s kind of going on, yes, what of why? I don’t want, don’t want to negotiate. It’s like, Ah, they’re gonna think that, you know, I’m over asking, or I’m greedy, like all those things are that you’re, you’re thinking, so you’re really, you’re really just pointing to the elephant in the room, and you’re just trying to take this thing out and really let the air out of the room, you know, where a lot of people just get so nervous about this. So a good accusation audit is, Hey, Tim, I really appreciate the offer of, you know, $100,000 you know, to work, you know to work with your you know, with your organization. You’re probably gonna think that I’m the greediest person on planet Earth, but I was really looking for this to that, or great line, great. Or you’re, or you’re probably thinking that I’m gonna, I’m asking way too much, or you’re probably thinking that I’m way under qualified for this position, but here’s what I’m thinking. So you’re so again, like, no. Tim, right, right? So when someone says that to me, I’m like, No, I don’t think that. And what often happens, and again, this, this, clients have told me this, what often happens is that the person you know, the counterpart that they’re working with, like, they’re they, they’re recruited as, like, you know, one person said one client was like, Oh, we’re gonna find you more money. We’re gonna figure it out. So they like, you know. So when someone says that to you, you know, just think about how you would feel, you know, I don’t think that at all. And then it just kind of lets the the air out of the room. So you basically preface your counter offer with like, the. The worst things that they could say about about you, and then they typically say that’s not, that’s not true at all. So I love the accusation on it’s so simple, it’s kind of easy to remember. And I think it’s just, it just lays, I think, the groundwork for just great conversation and hopefully resolution.

Tim Ulbrich  45:16

That’s awesome. And then let’s wrap up with a goal of getting to a, that’s right. I remember when I was listening to interview with Chris Voss, this is a part that I heard, and I thought, Wow, that’s so powerful. If you can get in the midst of this negotiation, if we can get to a, yeah, that’s right, the impact that that could happen in the outcome.

Tim Baker  45:33

So, so he kind of talks about it like, you know, kind of put in all of these different tools together, so it’s, um, you know, mirroring and labeling and kind of, you know, using, I think, what he calls minimal encouragements of, uh huh, I see, kind of paraphrasing back what you hear from your from your counterpart, and then really wait for it’s like, Hey, did I get that? Did I get that right? Or am I tracking and what you’re really looking for is that that’s right. And he said, that’s even better than than a yes. So, like, one of the examples I give is, you know, when, when I speak with prospective clients, you know, we’re talking about, like my student loans and my investment portfolio and my, you know, I’m not doing real budgeting, and, you know, I got sold a life insurance policy that I think isn’t great for me. And so we go through all these different parts of the financial plan, and I basically am summarizing back what, you know, what they’re saying, and I say, you know, at the end of it. So I’m summarizing, you know, 30 minutes of conversation, and, you know, I’m saying that, did I? Did I get that right? And they’re like, Yeah, that’s right. You’re, you know, a great listener, which I have to record for my wife sometimes because she doesn’t agree with me. So that’s what you what you what you’re looking for is, is, yeah, that’s right. This person has heard, you know, message sent, heard, understands me. He says, if you get a, if you if you get a, you’re right. So sometimes, again, I keep talking about my wife. I’m like, Hey, Shay, we have to do a better job of saving for retirement. She’s like, you’re right. That’s really code for Shut up and go away. So it’s a, it’s a That’s right, is what, what really what we’re what we’re looking for. So that’s, that’s, yeah, very powerful.

Tim Ulbrich  47:08

That’s great stuff. And really just a great overall summary of some tips within the negotiation process, the steps of the negotiation process, how it fits into the financial plan. We hope folks walk away with that and just a good reminder of our comprehensive financial planning services that we do at yp planning. This is a great example of when we say comprehensive, we mean it so it’s not just investments, it’s not just student loans, it’s really every part of the financial plan, anything that has $1 sign on it. We want our clients to be in conversation and working with our financial planners to make sure we’re optimizing that and looking at all parts of one’s financial planning here, negotiation is a good example of that. So we reference lots of resources. Main one we talked about here today was never split the difference by Chris Voss. We will link to that in our show notes, and as a reminder to access the show notes, you can go to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/podcast, find this week’s episode. Click on that, you’ll be able to access a transcription of the episode as well as as the show notes and the resources. And last but not least, if you like what you heard on this week’s episode of the podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts, wherever you listen to the show. Each and every week, have a great rest of your day.

[DISCLAIMER]

As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products, we urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archive, newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyzes expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published such information may contain forward looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit your financial pharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 383: 5 Overlooked & Undervalued Areas of the Financial Plan


Tim Ulbrich, YFP CEO explores five often-overlooked areas of financial planning from credit, tax planning, emergency funds, insurance, and estate planning.

Episode Summary

Tim Ulbrich, YFP CEO, dives into five critical—but often overlooked—areas of financial planning that deserve more attention. While these topics might not be as thrilling as investing, making big purchases, or debt reduction, they’re essential for a strong financial foundation. Tim covers the importance of: building and maintaining credit; proactive tax planning; establishing an emergency fund; reviewing health, life and disability insurance policies; and estate planning. 

Learn how to give these areas the attention they deserve, helping you create a more resilient and well-rounded financial plan.

About Today’s Guest

Tim Ulbrich is the Co-Founder and CEO of Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 15,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. To date, YFP has partnered with 75+ organizations to provide personal finance education.

Tim received his Doctor of Pharmacy degree from Ohio Northern University and completed postgraduate residency training at The Ohio State University. He spent 9 years on faculty at Northeast Ohio Medical University prior to joining Ohio State University College of Pharmacy in 2019 as Clinical Professor and Director of the Master’s in Health-System Pharmacy Administration Program.

Tim is the host of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast which has more than 1 million downloads. Tim is also the co-author of Seven Figure Pharmacist: How to Maximize Your Income, Eliminate Debt and Create Wealth. Tim has presented to over 200 pharmacy associations, colleges, and groups on various personal finance topics including debt management, investing, retirement planning, and financial well-being.

Key Points from the Episode

  • Importance of credit in the financial plan [0:00]
  • Shifting mindset from tax preparation to tax planning [3:30]
  • Setting up an emergency fund [9:51]
  • Reviewing insurance coverage [13:31]
  • Estate planning [19:51]
  • Invitation to consider YFP’s financial planning services [24:57]

Episode Highlights

“[Life insurance] is especially important for those that have a spouse, a partner, a significant other, or dependents that are reliant upon your income or partially reliant upon your income.When we think about the purpose of a life insurance policy, one of the main purposes is income protection.” – Tim Ulbrich [13:31]

“I really want you to shift your mindset to think proactively and strategically about your tax situation. And I recognize that sounds obvious, but I used to view, as perhaps some of you may, tax very much to be as something in the rear view mirror.” – Tim Ulbrich [6:30]

“According to a 2023 caring.com survey, two out of three Americans do not have any type of estate planning documents in place, and that makes sense, right? It’s not super fun to be thinking about, but the whole purpose of the estate plan is that we want to have a process to arrange the management of our assets.” – Tim Ulbrich [22:57]

“What we should also be doing practically here is making sure that we check our beneficiaries on our various accounts, and as we have talked about before on the show, updating or implementing a legacy folder, which is an important one stop shop where you have all of our financial documents and information.” – Tim Ulbrich [24:00]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich  00:00

Hey everybody. Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to the YFP podcast, where, each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, on flying solo, to talk about five areas of the financial plan that are often overlooked and undervalued. Now, to be fair, none of these areas are very exciting to think about, especially if you’re focused on more inspiring goals, like investing, making a large purchase, giving or paying down debt, where you can feel the progress, or in the case of something like giving, you can see the impact that that may be having in the area that you’re giving or in your community. But with these five areas, what I’m referring to here are estate planning, the emergency fund, insurance coverage, tax planning and credit that isn’t necessarily the case. And there are instances where, when we are doing well in these individual areas, we might be able to see or reap the benefits of that. But for the most part, this is some of the boring work of the financial plan that we’re really playing defense in several of these cases and making sure that we’ve got that strong base and foundation in place. 

Tim Ulbrich  01:04

So let’s take a closer look at each one of these areas, starting off with number one, which is credit. Now we just talked about credit on the Yfp podcast not too long ago, episode 380 we’ll link to that episode in the show notes, understanding and improving your credit score. And as we said on that show at the time, credit is one of those threads that touches many parts of the financial plan, and having good credit puts you in a position to take calculated risks in the form of leverage that could be buying a home, that could be buying a second property, that could be starting a business and doing so at the lowest cost possible. And fair or not, our financial system rewards those who can take on and pay off credit. And I know many of us were told at one time or another, probably by a parent or a family member, to build your credit. Right? Build your credit. But how much does building your credit and improving your credit actually matter? Well, let’s take it look at one example, if we assume that we have two home buyers, let’s assume one has a credit score that is considered excellent at a 10, and another home buyer has a credit score that’s considered fair score of 640 well that might end up being the difference of a 6% interest rate on a 30 year mortgage, thinking of the excellent credit versus a 7% interest rate on a 30 year mortgage, that would be for the person with the Fair Credit Score. Now, what does that actually mean per month and over the life of the loan? Well, the individual who got the lower interest rate because the better credit would have a monthly payment of about $2,400 per month, principal and interest only, and the individual had fair credit would have a higher monthly payment of a little over 2660 per month, again, principal and interest only. Now, over the course of the life of the loan, over 30 years, that ends up being a total cost of loan of 958,000 approximately principal and interest for the individual with fair credit, versus 863,000 for the individual that had excellent credit, same house, same situation, but two people with different credit scores, which shows a difference of about $260 a month, or $94,000 over the life of the loan.

Now if you start to apply this concept is securing other debt, right? Credit card, car purchase, investment property, starting a business, taking on a loan, et cetera. That cost of credit adds up in the form of less favorable lending terms. And since your credit score is a key metric that will be used by lenders to determine how favorable or not the lending terms are, it’s really important that we understand what goes in to the credit score, because the more we understand about those factors, the more levers we can pull to improve our score. And as we talked about on Episode 380, the top factors that impact your credit include payment history, so making sure we’re making on time payments and credit utilization, so the amount of credit that we’re using each month alongside the maximum amount that we’re given. Those two alone make up about two thirds of their credit score other factors, and would be age of credit history, total number of accounts and the number of hard inquiries on your credit. So again, check out Episode 380 and this is something we encourage you to be looking at your credit score on a regular basis as well as polling your credit report, not the same thing as your credit score, to make sure that there’s no negative marks, derogatory marks on your credit report that you’re not aware of, and so that you can clean those up and evaluate those further if need be. So that’s number one on our list of five overlooked and undervalued areas of the financial plan, all right. 

Number two on our list is tax planning, with the October 15 extension, filing extension deadline officially behind us. The 2023 tax season is over. I know our tax team is excited about that. There’s a couple outliers because of. Some taxpayers in disaster areas are impacted by the hurricanes that are getting additional time for good reason. Now on that note, did you know that with an extension you have until October 15, right? We typically think mid April, but with an extension you have until October 15 to file your individual taxes, and for those that do that, October 15 extension, which is actually very common for many of our clients at wifey tax, we believe in right over rushed. Extending the deadline does not mean that you are not responsible for payments on any tax due. Incredibly important, right? The IRS expects you will make payments on time, and if not, penalties and interest will be assessed. So the October 15 extension is a beautiful thing. If you’re doing good tax planning throughout the year and don’t have a big balance due, as that would occur, incur a penalty and interest if we don’t pay it on time, or the other side of the equation, if you have a big refund coming, while many of us think big refund equals good, in that case, we just delayed now the time of getting that refund and putting those dollars to work. All right, enough about that. But when we think about tax as one of the overlooked and undervalued areas of the financial plan, similar to credit, right? This is a thread that runs throughout many areas of our financial plan, and I really want you to be shifting your mindset to be thinking proactively and strategically about your tax situation. And I recognize that sounds obvious, but I used to view as perhaps some of you may as well tax very much to be as something in the rear view mirror. Right? We file each year by the mid April, or as you learn here, the mid October deadline to meet the IRS requirements and to account for what happened the previous year. And I remember early on, you know, whether you’re using TurboTax or some software to do yourself, you’re working with an accountant, you kind of hold your breath and wait for the news, right? Am I going to get a refund? Am I going to have a certain amount of due? But we probably didn’t pay too much attention throughout the year, and ultimately, what that led to was either several refunds. That was the case for us early on, that we could have been putting those dollars to use elsewhere throughout the year. So when you go to File each year and we’re finally what happened in the previous year, that’s retroactive, right? And want us to shift our thinking, to be more proactive, and so to move our mindset from tax preparation, that’s important. It’s necessary. The IRS says we have to do it. We have to file our taxes, but to think more in the mindset of tax planning, right? A very important distinction of mindset shift so that we can think proactively and how we can optimize our tax strategy. Now I want to challenge you that if you don’t already know your key numbers, things like your effective tax rate, your adjusted gross income, it’s time to get out the IRS Form 1040 we’ll link to a copy in the show notes, and take 10 or 15 minutes to make sure that you understand the terminology and the flow of dollars. Because when we start to understand how the 1040 flows, we understand these terms, we can really begin to have this concept of tax planning come to life adjusted gross income, just as one example, has very important implications on things like student loan payments for those that are doing an income driven repayment plan, as well as certain phase outs on things like child and child care credits, Ira contribution, student loan interest deduction and so much more. Now on Episode 309 of the podcast, our CPA and director of tax, Sean Richards, cover the top 10 tax blunders that pharmacists have made, as we’ve seen through the filing process. So whether someone has a negative net worth or a net worth of several million dollars, I think you’re gonna find some value in that episode if you didn’t already listen to that. These are mistakes like having a surprise bill or refund at filing. And what are the common causes pharmacists that potentially could be employing something like a bunching strategy for their giving and just not aware of that strategy, those that should be thinking about estimated taxes throughout the year and are caught by a surprise after that, not not optimizing things like the HSA or traditional retirement contributions to reduce our taxable income, and an oldie but a goodie, not factoring in public service loan forgiveness when choosing married filing separately or married filing jointly. So again, make sure to check out that episode. Episode 309. Great time of year to be thinking about that as we’re heading into the 2024, tax season. That’s number two on our list of five overlooked and undervalues areas of the financial plan, tax planning. 

Number three on our list is the emergency fund. Now, if you’ve been listening to the podcast for a while, you hear me harping on the emergency fund every once in a while, and because it’s that important, right? Saving for a rainy day, saving for an emergency it’s not easy. It’s not fun. It takes discipline, it takes patience, it takes trust to save for something you can’t yet, see, feel or experience. In the moment, but we all know that it’s not a matter of if, but it’s a matter of when. And so as we’re putting in other key parts of the financial plan, we don’t want something that is likely to happen, although we don’t know exactly what it will be, right, whether it’s a cut in Job hours, whether it’s a health emergency, whatever it might be, we don’t want that to derail our progress in other parts of the financial plan, as I’ve shared before in the show in the not too distant past, Jess and I have had to dip into the emergency fund for an unexpected knee surgery that we had to pay 100% out of pocket because of our health insurance. We had a dislocated elbow for our youngest, a trip to the ER for our oldest, for the busted lip, right? The list can go on. And so life happens. That’s the point, and we want to be ready to be able to incur those expenses. And when it comes to things like health care expenses and unexpected health care expenses, everyone’s insurance is different, right? So we got to look at what is a deductible, what’s the out of pocket Max, and know that we have to have a backstop of our emergency fund at a minimum to cover those things, as well as other emergencies that will come along the way. So this area of the plan is all about peace of mind, as I mentioned, it’s about making sure we’re not derailing other parts of the financial plan. And my experience tells me that when you have an emergency come up, and you have an unexpected expense come up, and we’ve got the funds that are there to handle it, a really important mindset shift happens. It’s not fun to write those checks, but when we’re able to do that, because we plan for it, we go from playing defense to playing offense. We’ve got breathing room, we’ve got margin, and perhaps we can even take some calculated risk in other areas of our financial plan that might have been unthinkable just knowing that we’ve got this backstop, we’ve got this foundation in place. So we’ve talked about the emergency fund at length on the show before. I’m not going to bore you further on this, but we want to be making sure that we’re answering important questions like, Is it adequately funded? Generally speaking, that’s three to six months worth of essential expenses. Everyone’s situation, of course, is different. We need to be answering questions like, do we have too much saved in an emergency fund? Right? There’s value in having a cushion, but having too much of a cushion comes with an opportunity cost, and so have we grown that to a point that we might be able to use some of that for other parts of the financial plan? We need to answer questions like, Are we optimizing our emergency fund? This is not the place that we’re going to take risk necessarily. We want this money to be liquid and accessible and available when we need it, but we also don’t want this sitting in our checking account earning next to nothing, right? So this, this could be in a high yield savings account, money market account, US Treasuries, something that the money is working for us, or at least coming as close as possible to keeping up with inflation. And as I mentioned, you know, with other parts of the financial plan, we want to make sure this isn’t a set it and forget it. So life changes as we progress. Our expenses change over time. And so each year, I would challenge you to look at this once a year to see what is that amount, what’s that target goal when it comes to the emergency fund, and is there a potential boost that is needed to the emergency fund?

Number four on our list is insurance coverage. And there is lots to think about when it comes to insurance, but I want to narrow in on two policies in particular, which would be life insurance and Long Term Disability Insurance. Now life insurance, for obvious reasons, is not fun to think about. Right? Nobody wants to consider what a premature death may look like and how the impact of that would be on their family and on the financial plan.

This is especially important for those that have a spouse, a partner, a significant other, or dependents that are reliant upon your income or partially reliant upon your income. Right? When we think about the purpose of a life insurance policy, one of the main purposes is income protection. So in order to determine how much of a policy we may need, we need to ultimately determine what would be the need if you were to prematurely pass away, and what part of your income that is no longer coming in from work do we need to replace in the form of an insurance policy to be able to achieve various goals that could be paying down a mortgage, that could be investing for the future, that could be saving for kids college, right? What are the things that we would need for this policy to fund lots of work to be done there, and why generic calculations shouldn’t be applied when it comes to things like life insurance. Now there are two main buckets of life insurance. There’s a category of life insurance called permanent insurance. These would be things like whole life insurance policies, universal life insurance policies, variable life insurance policies, variable, universal life insurance policies, right? The alphabet soup of whole whole life and permanent insurance, and then the second bucket is term life insurance. And for the sake of this episode and our time together, I’m going to spend our time there, because I believe that for a majority of folks listening, a term life insurance policy is going to be the way to go. That’s not an absolute. That’s not a. Ice that’s not for everyone, but for many folks, that’s going to be the area of focus. And we’ve got a great resource on this, if you want to nerd out. It’s called the life insurance for pharmacists, our ultimate guide to free resource. We’ll link to that in the show notes. But essentially, with a term life insurance policy, what differs it from a permanent insurance policy it is, is that it is insurance alone. It is not paired with an investment product. 

Another important difference is that with a term life insurance policy, as the name suggests, it lasts for a term or a period that could be 15 years, 2025, or 30 years, and you’re going to pay a monthly premium. And for that monthly premium you’re gonna have a set amount that that policy would pay out could be a half million dollars, $1,000,000.02 million dollars, whatever you decide is the need in the event of your death, and once that policy is period is complete, once that term is over, if you’re no longer needing that policy, meaning that you’ve survived or outlived that policy, which is good news, right? There’s no dollars that are coming back to you. So the premiums you’ve been paying each and every month, let’s say you pay 40 bucks a month for a million dollar term life policy over a 20 year period. At the end of 20 years, if we don’t have to enact or use the policy, that’s it. The policy is over. None of those premium dollars are coming back to you, which is the point that is typically used when folks are selling permanent insurance policies that are like, why would you want that money just to go down the drain again? Check out our article life insurance pharmacist, The Ultimate Guide for a more in depth discussion of the different aspects of these policies. This, in my opinion, for most folks listening, why term life insurance coverage is the focus is because this is really meant to be catastrophic coverage, keeping our costs low, so we can use those dollars elsewhere in the financial plan, typically permanent and child policies are much more expensive, typically carry some fees on the investments may not necessarily perform as well as we could invest the dollars on our own, or we’re in working with a professional so with term life insurance, assuming someone is healthy, very much dependent on medical conditions and age of that individual in terms of how much that policy will be, as well as the term or length, but relatively inexpensive for most folks, and is going to allow us to put our cash and dollars to use elsewhere in the financial plan. That’s just a couple key nuggets when it comes to something like life insurance. Now, with long term Disability insurance, one of the greatest assets that you have as a pharmacist is your ability to generate an income. Right?

Think about how long it took you to be able to get that point of becoming licensed, to be able to earn that six figure plus income. And so the focus of long term disability is what would happen in the event that you were unable to earn that income. Now we address the death scenario in something like a term life policy. Here we’re talking about could be a disability, like a chronic medical condition, rheumatoid arthritis, some other condition that would prevent someone from working or working in their position, or it could be something like a car accident, right? Not likely, but these are things that we need to protect if that were to happen, what is the plan to be able to replace your income that you’re earning while you’re able to work as a pharmacist? That’s the purpose of disability insurance. Again, we’ve got a great resource here, disability insurance for pharmacists, The Ultimate Guide. We’ll link to that in the show notes. Lots to think about in terms of how much coverage you might need, the different terms like elimination periods of time, what’s the length of the policy, the potential costs, these are typically more expensive than term life insurance policy.

So make sure to check out that resource from Yfp that we published disability insurance for pharmacists, The Ultimate Guide. We’ll link to both of those in the short show notes. Now, when it comes to purchasing term life insurance and disability insurance, there are a lot of factors to consider. This is one of the reasons why our planning team spends time with our clients individually, going through these policies to make sure they’re customized to the individual. Things like, what’s the goal or the purpose? What are we trying to accomplish with these policies? What employer coverage Do you already have in place, and do we need additional coverage? What are the tax differences between an employer policy that pays out versus a policy on your own? And then, of course, everyone’s situation is different, right? What’s your household income? Is there one income two incomes in the household? What are their goals? What reserves do you have? What expenses are we trying to replace? All these things are going to help us determine what policy is needed, and then from there, we can look to make a purchasing decision that aligns. So that’s number four on our list when it comes to insurance. 

Number five, our final of our five overlooked and undervalued areas of the financial plan is the estate plan. Now if you’re listening and you realize that you’ve got some work to do in getting your estate planning documents in place. Know that you aren’t alone. According to a 2023 caring.com survey, we’ll link to that in the show notes, two out of three Americans do not have any type of estate planning documents in place, and that makes sense, right? Just like we’ve been talking about some of these other areas. Nine. Not super fun to be thinking about, but the whole purpose of the estate plan is that we want to have a process to arrange the management of our assets. The management of our property decisions around dependents could be decisions around child care or assets that are going to dependents or others, and in the case of our health, if we were to become, let’s say, incapacitated. Who’s making healthcare decisions? What are those decisions that we want to have made, and making those from a viewpoint in which we’re able to think about those with a clear mind? So that’s the estate planning process in a nutshell, and especially for those that have dependents and have beneficiaries, these are documents that we want to have in place, and just like we talked about with the emergency fund, this is not a set it and forget it. So yes, there’s some upfront work to be done here, from some upfront costs, typically, as well, to do these documents and do them well with a consultation from an estate planning attorney as well as hopefully working with a financial planner. But things change right? Things evolve over time, and we want to make sure that we have a process to update these documents along the way. So the objective with estate planning, yes, it’s peace of mind, right, knowing that we’ve got plans in place for our family, for our assets, for the stuff, for our health care and the decisions that are being made, but as folks accrue assets over time, there are also some tax planning considerations when we think about the transfer of assets that are really important to be considering along the way as well. So practically speaking, what do we need to do here? Well, check out Episode 310, of the podcast, if you didn’t already catch it, where Tim and I talked about dusting off your estate plan. We’ll link to that in the show notes. These are important documents, like wills and living trusts, advanced medical directives, durable powers of attorney.

And at YFP, our financial planning team is are working with clients, one on one to put a framework in place for what are the estate planning needs, and then working with a solution that relies on estate planning attorneys and legal advice to make sure that those are being executed appropriately for the state in which that individual lives. What we should also be doing practically here is making sure that we check our beneficiaries on our various accounts, and as we have talked about before on the show, updating or implementing if you don’t already have one, a legacy folder, right, which is an important one stop shop where we have all of our financial documents and information in place at our house. We call this the blue folder. Much of it is electronic now, but the original version was a hard copy blue folder. Some of it resides electronically. Some of it resides in our safe but it’s the one stop shop that we know that if Jess and I were in a situation where we weren’t able to access that information or communicate that that our family knows where that information is, like our state planning documents, important insurance policies, tax returns, our various investment accounts, all the information that would be needed to make some decisions along the way. We’ve got a checklist resource here if you want to develop your own legacy folder, you can go to your financial pharmacist.com, forward slash legacy and begin to implement that in your own financial plan. Well, there you have it. Those are five overlooked and undervalued areas of the financial plan. A lot of information and things to be thinking about. These are all areas of the financial plan that our team of certified financial planners are working one on one with our financial planning clients as well as our tax planning clients at Yfp tax and so if you’re interested in learning more about what those comprehensive financial planning and tax planning services look like, we’d love to have an opportunity to talk with you further to learn more about your situation. You can learn more about our services and determine, ultimately, whether or not there’s a good fit there, you can book a free discovery call by going to your financial pharmacist.com, you’ll see at the top of the home page an option to book that call. Thanks so much for listening. Hope you enjoyed this week’s episode. Have a great rest of your week. 

[DISCLAIMER]

As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only, and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archive, newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyzes expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published such information may contain forward looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events, actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer.

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 380: Understanding & Improving Your Credit


Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker discuss the role of credit in financial planning: why it matters, how it works, what makes up a credit score, common credit misconceptions and more.

Episode Summary

In this episode, Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker discuss the role of credit in financial planning. They explore why credit matters, how it works, and how it influences important areas in your financial plan.

Tim and Tim break down the factors that make up a credit score, from payment history and credit utilization to the age of credit and hard inquiries. They also dispel common credit myths, essential strategies for protecting your credit and identity, including the importance of monitoring credit reports.

About Today’s Guest

Tim Baker is the Co-Founder and Director of Financial Planning at Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 12,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. 

Tim attended the United States Military Academy majoring in International Relations and branching Armor. After his military career, he worked as a logistician with a major retailer and a construction company. After much deliberation, Tim decided to make a pivot in his career and joined a small independent financial planning firm in 2012. In 2016, he launched his own financial planning firm Script Financial and in 2019 merged with Your Financial Pharmacist. Tim now lives in Columbus, Ohio with his wife (Shay), three kids (Olivia, Liam and Zoe), and dog (Benji).

Key Points from the Episode

  • Understanding the Importance of Credit [0:00]
  • Debt Utilization and Its Impact [2:07]
  • How Credit Works and Its Impact on Financial Planning [32:14]
  • Factors Affecting Credit Scores [32:27]
  • Strategies to Improve Credit Scores [32:38]
  • Common Credit Misperceptions [32:52]
  • Credit Security and Identity Protection [33:06]
  • Conclusion and Future Topics [38:27]

Episode Highlights

“If you kind of look at some of the things that credit affects, it’s your ability to get credit and what you pay on that debt. So interest rates. Lenders use your credit score and history to determine whether to approve a loan or to give you preferable or less than preferable rates, and this affects mortgage, auto and personal loans.” Tim Baker [08:17]

“The credit report is kind of your report card with regard to your credit. It’ll show all the different adverse accounts and also accounts that are in good standing. Now, it’s hard, in a snapshot world to say, okay, like I’m looking at a bunch of pages of a credit report. How does a creditor, as someone that’s going to lend this person money, quantify the ability to pay back in a timely manner? That’s where we get the credit score. The credit score basically distills down your ability to pay back the money that you owe. – Tim Baker [11:20]

“If we talk about the factors of a credit score, probably the highest impact factor is payment history, and from what I understand, it makes about 35% of your score. This is the most predictive factor in determining whether a borrower will repay debt as a history of on time payments indicate lower risk for lenders. So if you are missing payments, then your score is gonna get hurt.” -Tim Baker [18:17] 

“It’s important to know what’s not used to calculate credit scores:  age, sex, religion, race, marital status, zip code, if you’ve ever disputed things on a credit credit report, employment history, occupation and salary. So they don’t care if you make $200,000 or $2 million a year. As we say, income is not a financial plan. Income is also not a good credit score.” – Tim Baker [28:05]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich  00:00

Hey everybody. Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, Tim Baker and I talk all about credit as an important thread of the financial plan. Specifically, we discuss why credit matters, how credit works, the makeup of a credit score, and how to improve that score, common credit misperceptions and strategies to protect your identity and secure your credit before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not already be aware that at YFP, we support pharmacists at every stage of their careers to take control their finances, reach their financial goals and build wealth through one on one comprehensive, fee-only financial planning and tax planning. If you’re ready to see how YFP can support you on your financial journey, you can book a free discovery call by visiting yourfinancialpharmacist.com. Whether or not our financial planning and tax services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. All right, let’s jump into today’s episode. 

Tim Ulbrich  01:08

Tim Baker, welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker  01:10

Good to be back. Tim, how’s it going?

Tim Ulbrich  01:12

It is going well, I’m excited for this discussion. I’m not sure most listeners are going to be. I think when they see something like credit, maybe, maybe like tax, they’re like, whoa, blah. You know, not, not the most exciting thing to discuss. But I think especially true for those that are focused on more inspiring goals of the financial plan, right? Those that are focused on investing or making a large purchase, maybe paying down debt or giving goals that you’re working towards achieving, those are, those are exciting, right? Credit, maybe like tax, not so much, but as we’re hopefully going to lay the case out today, such an important thread and part of the financial plan that we want to make sure we’re aware of and we’re optimizing the best that we can. So we’re going to talk today about why credit matters. Factors that impact your credit score. If we understand those, we can work to improve those. Some of the misperceptions around credit, and then how to protect your credit and how to protect your identity with credit. So Tim, before we get any further, I think it’s important that we check in with ourselves about debt and how we feel about debt, whether it be having debt, using debt, everyone can feel different if we think about the spectrum of this. So tell us more about debt utilization and why this is important before we get into the discussion of optimizing credit.

Tim Baker  02:27

Yeah. So if you look at the spectrum of debt, you know, you, most people probably heard of the term, like good debt and bad debt. And I think, like, if you put all the types of debt out there, you know, everyone’s line is a little bit different, probably not too different. So if you think if you think about like things like a mortgage debt, so you know, this is a note that you have on a home that you’re living in, it’s a use asset. Maybe you’re raising a family. Hopefully that home is appreciated over time, so you are paying interest on it. Most people would say, Hey, pretty good debt. Things like, if we go over kind of a notch, you know, something like student loan debt, which I know is near and dear to a lot of our listeners, a lot of people still say, for the most part, student loan. You take out loans to be educated and trained, for the ability, for the opportunity to essentially earn out earned peers that don’t necessarily have a college degree. You can argue there’s probably a spectrum inside of that spectrum itself, of like, what’s good student loan debt and bad student loan debt type of thing, but most people would say, hey, you know, even today, most people would agree, the studies show that if you’re if you, if you have a degree, you’re going to earn more over the course of your career. So most people say good debt. When you get beyond that, that’s where it kind of gets a little bit shady. So you know, the next one over is probably things like, like a car note, like an auto debt. The problem with a car note is that you’re you are paying interest on an asset that is depreciated the second that it pulls off the lot, and every year thereafter. So it’s still a use asset. It does the job of kind of getting you from A to B, hopefully, you know, to work or just to live your daily life. But a lot of financial experts would say, if you can go without, you know, financing a car, do that right? Because of all the things that I mentioned. What I typically see the evolution of things, Tim, is like a lot of people, if they’re a couple, a lot of them will see them early in their career. Maybe there’s two car notes, and then maybe they transition to one, and then towards the end of their career, we should be buying cars in cash. And I think it does, you know, force the issue of, like, do we really need an, you know, $80,000 car? You know, can we get by on a $30, $40,000 or whatever it is? Again, no, hate on that. If that, if that’s your your bag, it’s just, you know, is this part of your plan? But most people, that’s kind of where the line is drawn is like, okay, what kind of debt is that? Is that good, bad or indifferent? So from there, you get into things like the cost of, you know, like furniture. A lot of people, hey, I just moved, you know, I need to, you know, I, uh, basically fit out my apartment. So I’m, I’m putting furniture on, uh, on, on debt, and I’m paying that off. Again, a lot of people say, don’t necessarily do that, and you have all the way out to so, you know, the purchases of wants and not necessarily needs, that’s typically can fall on credit card debt, which can be super predatory, if that can get out of control. And you know, you have things like payday loans, which are, you know, really, really bad. So that spectrum of sorts is kind of where you, you know, kind of review. And I would have people look at their own debt that’s on the books and say, Hey, like, is this good bad debt? And if it’s, if it’s bad debt, let’s really, you know, that’s the bleeding head wound potentially, of your financial plan. So let’s really tend to that and triage that. If it’s good debt, we’re not going to, you know, ignore it. We’re going to have a plan for it. But we just know that it’s more about the plan to pay off the debt versus paying off the debt, you know, make sure that we’re doing for the bad debt. So that’s kind of the spectrum in terms of how I look at at debt, and you know, how this can fit over, you know, into the whole, you know, credit, you know, credit discussion.

Tim Ulbrich  06:05

It’s important we start there, right? Because credit, by definition, is we’re taking on debt, right? And we’ll talk about how that might be utilized. What are the risk? What are the upside, you know, potential leverage opportunities. How do you optimize credit? Where does it have an impact? But you know that is a step in the direction of taking on debt. Now, some people will talk about the different types of more detail if you’re paying off card each and every month, like you might not look at that as necessary taking on debt, but that’s essentially what the bank is evaluating. Is, what is your risk? What risk are you to the bank in terms of being able to pay off that debt? And that’s going to depend on the terms that you’re able to get. And I think, as we so often say when we think about debt for our own financial plan, or I know our team’s doing this when they’re advising people, we’ve got to look at the math, we’ve got to look at the different types of debt, and we’ve got to look at how someone feels about the debt, and we put all of that together when we’re looking at debt as a part of the financial plan. And when you have two individuals, spouses, partners, significant others, coming together on the financial plan, especially if we have different feelings around debt, you know, there has to be some discussion to be to be had there as well.

Tim Baker  07:06

Yeah, for sure. I mean, there, there are, there are some people we take the student loans, for example. There’s some people that are like, this needs to go yesterday, like, I have anxiety. It’s a weight, blah, blah, blah. And there’s some people that are like, meh, yeah, it is what it is, right? Yeah. And that emotion plays right? So I think now, again, I think the way you can like, if you’re like meh for credit card debt, like, I think there’s a like we there’s a realignment that we need to do like, because, again, mathematically, if you’re a meh, you’re gonna, you’re gonna see that, you know, talk to a prospective client that had $25,000 in credit card debt, you’re gonna see that, if you have a meh attitude, that 25,000 is gonna grow, you know, balloon to $50k. Very, very quickly. So I think it’s important to understand that too. 

Tim Ulbrich  07:50

So let’s jump into our first part of the episode, why credit matters. And as we start this discussion, I think it’s important we understand how credit works. And so Tim, you know, as a consumer, you know, whether it be, you know, credit card purchase you’re using, you know, you swipe your card at the store, and then somehow, some way, that ends up impacting our credit report, our credit score, as well as other types of debt. So take us through the credit cycle so we can understand how credit works. 

Tim Baker  08:17

Yeah, before I get into this, let me, let me just talk about, like, kind of the legislation that kind of set us on this path of like our credit system so, or at least revised. So back in 2003 the Fair and Accurate Credit Transaction Act, or FACT Act was passed that essentially allows free access to credit reports, and kind of what I’m describing here shortly, to every US resident, at least one free credit report every 12 months from each of the three major credit reporting agencies, which is Equifax, Experian and Transgenium. It also set up provisions to reduce identity theft, which we know continuously are becoming more and more of a thing as we as we kind of transition to more, even more and more of a digital world. It requires, you know, companies to securely dispose of your consumer information. That’s a big thing for us as an RIA oversight by the SEC, and on the tax side, a tax firm oversight by the SEC like or the IRS, I should say there, it’s a big deal, right? And the last thing it does is it doesn’t necessarily require a lot of these companies to give you free credit credit scores, and we’ll talk about the, you know, the report versus the score, but they become more ubiquitous through like, Hey, you can get it through an app or your bank oftentimes. So a lot of that has been, you know, less a B to C of like, Hey, Tim Baker’s gonna go buy my you know, see my credit score, where the places that I bank or do business with kind of do that B to B, and then they and then they do that as a benefit if I’m banking or doing whatever with them. So the fact that kind of, like lays the groundwork, essentially how this works, Tim, is you have, you the consumer, you the the the borrower, and your behaviors kind of, kind of start this cycle. So you essentially, you know, you’ll go and you’ll buy a car, or you’ll swipe your credit card for groceries. Essentially what, what’s happening here is, when I do that, I’m asking MasterCard or Toyota, a creditor for credit to basically make these purchases because I don’t have or I don’t want to spend the cash in that moment. The creditor, especially for something major, like a car, a car note or a mortgage, will say, okay, this person do I want to grant them credit? So the way they typically do is they look at those three reporting agencies that are there that are basically the gatekeepers of the information of the behavior related to your ability to pay back your debts in full and on time. So those reporting agencies for all the different transactions, whether it’s credit cards, whether it’s another type of revolving debt, student loan, a mortgage, whatever it is, collate all this information from these creditors and at the reporting agencies, and then they basically build out credit reports. So the credit report is kind of your report card with regard to your credit, credit, so it’ll show all the different, you know, adverse accounts. So hopefully you don’t have any of those. And then also accounts that are in good standing, that are basically like, Hey, we’re doing what we’re supposed to be doing. Now, it’s hard, in a snapshot world to say, okay, like I’m looking at a bunch of pages of a credit report. How do I actually as a creditor, as someone that’s going to lend this person money? How do I quantify their ability to pay me back in a timely manner, and that’s where we get the credit score. So the credit score basically distills down your ability to pay back the money that you owe, and then that credit score then feeds back to you where you say, okay, hey, I have a 750 or an 800 credit score. So then I then take that back to the credit card and say, like, see, this is like, I’m good, or like, maybe I’m not so good, and that affects, again, that whole cycle. So that’s essentially how it works, in terms of, like, how credit is tracked and reported and then quantified for you, the consumer. 

Tim Ulbrich  12:18

That’s a great summary, Tim, because I think is we’ll talk about improving your credit score here in a little bit. If you understand your credit report and you’re checking your credit report, I know this is something you said on the show before, like, hey, mark your calendar once a year. Maybe it’s when the clocks change, whatever, where you’re pulling your report, right? You mentioned the three agencies, Equifax, Experian, TransUnion, and when you start to dig into those reports, you’ll understand the different variables of which are being aggregated up and reported on to the credit score, which will then help you understand, oh, well, maybe I can increase this or improve this, or do this differently to grab up my credit score, which then has an impact on the different parts of the financial plan. So all connected. Great description. And why does credit matter, right? I want to make sure we don’t, we don’t brush by that obvious but important question we’ve all probably been told at some point in our lives by a parent or, you know, an advisor, or someone like, you got to build credit. You got to have credit. You got to have a good credit history. What’s the so what? Why is this so important?

Tim Baker  13:17

Yeah, so I think, like, if you, if you kind of look at some of the things that credit effects, it’s, it’s it’s kind of your ability to get credit and like what you pay on that debt. So interest rates. So lenders use your credit score and history to determine whether approve a loan or to give you preferable or less than preferable rates, and this affects mortgage or auto personal loans. So good credit usually, you know, good credit score usually gets the best the lower interest rates. You know that which saves you money over time, which could be huge. When you talk about, you know, a 2, 3, 4, $500, $600,000 purchase, when we talk about a home. You know, renting a home, you know, a lot of landlords check credit reports to assess whether potential, tenants are financially responsible. We do this with our tenants. You know, it’s one of the things we that a lot of landlords will do to make sure that, hey, is this person going to actually, like, they’re going to assign the dot line say they’re going to, you know, pay this rent? Like, are they actually going to do it? Insurance premiums, in some cases, insurance companies use credit information to set premiums, particularly on auto insurance. Again, it’s kind of a measure of of reliability, even employment. Some employers check reports as a part of their hiring process. For you know, especially if it’s related, you know, to finances or sensitive information. So poor credit can negatively affect your job prospects. I think it’s tied, it’s also tied to utility services. So utility companies think electric, water, internet, may check your credit when you sign up for a service. So they could actually require a deposit or deposit or even deny services. You know, if you’re obviously, if you’re, if you’re applying for credit cards, you know you’re going to get the best rates and the higher, higher limits if you if you have better credit, maybe even better rewards. And then, you know, just good, like financial flexibility, right? A good credit history gives you more options for borrowing and managing your finances during emergencies or making major purchases. Now, some of those are going to be systemic, and we talk about this with business owners like right now is the time to get a line of credit right? Because once the market changes, or the economy, you know, we go through a recession, you know, that’s when, you know, a lot of credit freezes. So you want to establish good behavior and be able to access credit when things are good, not when things are bad, right? Goes back to planning. So that’s really the so what, Tim, of like, why it’s important, and is, I think it is becoming more of a measure of overall reliability. That is, again, it’s very much for your finances, but I think that’s a good indicator of your overall reliability in general. So that’s the so what.

Tim Ulbrich  15:59

That’s why I used the word thread earlier, right? Look at the list of examples you just gave of where this can impact the plan. I think the one that people are often thinking about is like, Oh, if I go to buy a home, you know, very practical. If my credit score is x versus y, and x is better than y, then I’m probably going to get a more favorable, you know, rate on my loan or, you know, buying a car purchase. But I think there’s some other ones that you’re alluding to when you talk about, like, line of credit out in the business on the business side, you know, having good credit puts you in a position to take calculated risks in the form of leverage, and to do so at the lowest cost possible. Now, calculated risk, right? There’s always going to be risk involved, and there can be a downside to that as well. But fair or not, I mean, that’s really the system that we live in, and and our financial systems are rewarding those who can take on and pay off their credit. And so, you know, starting a business, investing in a business, buying real estate, you know, beyond your primary all these things are going to require, unless you’re bringing cash, they’re going to require you to have your credit evaluated.

Tim Baker  16:54

That’s right, that’s right.

Tim Ulbrich  16:56

All right. Second part is understanding and improving your credit score. And there are several factors, Tim, that go into the credit score, and I think as we understand each one of these, we can begin to then think about the strategies to improve our score over time. Maybe some of our listeners have great credit, and it’s keep doing what you’re doing. Others, maybe, you know, because of a final year of pharmacy school residency, other things you know, they had missed payments and other types of debt that accrued. Maybe there’s some repair a credit that needs to go on. So take us through the the main factors as it relates to the makeup of a credit score, and especially those that have some of those higher impact factors. Yeah.

Tim Baker  17:37

So and when I, when I first started learning about credit back in the day. Tim, like, a lot of the information that I researched, and like, Credit Karma was a great resource for me. And if you actually, again, not a commercial for them. But I personally use Credit Karma, a lot of their things checked out. That’s where I can get, like, a free it’s not free -they’re selling my information. And every time I go on their app, you’re like, hey, this is a great credit card. So like, there is a there’s a price for it. But like, I was, you know, I was skeptical at first, I’m like, Hey, is this really legit? And then I, you know, actually purchased the TransUnion credit score and everything was kind of like, matched out, right? But they, I think they do a good job. It’s a great resource to kind of understand at a very high level, like, how this works. So if we talk about the factors of a credit score, where the rubber meets the road, probably the highest impact factor is payment history, and from what I understand, it makes about 35% of of your score. This is the most predictive factor and determine whether a borrower will repay debt as a history of on time payments indicate lower risk for lenders. So if you are missing payments, then you’re gonna, you know, your your score is gonna get hurt, which is gonna, you know, affect all those other things that we talked about. So can you pay your bills on time? And on time is actually flexible, so, like, once you go 30, days beyond like, a due date, that’s when you typically get hit. So like, if my credit card bill is due on October 15, and I miss that payment and I don’t pay it by November, if I pay it by November 1, I’m still good. It’s still on time for the credit reporting agencies. Once I get to that November 15 date, then that’s where I get I get dinged. So that is the that’s kind of where the rubber meets the road and everything else around this is important, but it’s not as important as, Are you paying your you know, what’s the history? Are you paying it back on time? The other high impact factor, which makes up about 30% it’s called, Credit Card Utilization. I’ve also seen it called like, what’s the amount that you owe, amounts owed? So this is the amount of debt you carry, especially as a percentage of your total credit line, your limit. So this is credit utilization, and it’s it’s highly correlated with risk. So in this case, what lenders like to see is it’s the lower your utilization, the better. So they like to say, hey, you have available credit to you, you’re just not using it. So anything that is basically 10% or below you, it’s typically excellent, right? So if I have a $10,000 limit on my credit card. Let’s say I have a five and a five. I have two cards. If I’m carrying anything more, carrying meaning like I don’t I don’t pay it off at the statement balance. If I’m carrying $2,000 then my credit utilization is 20% and that’s it’s still good, but it’s not excellent. So lenders like to see you have the ability to use it, but then they want you to pay it back in a timely way. So the big thing here is to keep the balances low. The next one, Tim and these, these last, really three or so, are more medium and low impact. So the next one is age of credit or, like, the length of credit history. So make sense, right? The longer you know, if this is not your first rodeo, the longer that you’ve been using credit successfully, it’s a little bit of like, like, again, your parents have been doing this for a while. If you’re just out of college, or you’re just in college, you don’t necessarily have the wherewithal to, like, understand how it works. So typically, the higher is better. So they want excellent means you’ve had, you know, accounts open for nine plus years, and this is on average. So lenders like to see that you have experience using using credit. The next one is the total accounts, which makes up about 10% that you can also think of this as, like credit mix mix, so managing a variety of credit types, whether it’s credit cards, auto loans, student loans, mortgages, suggest a responsible borrower that can handle different forms of credit. So the idea here is, they want you to be able to do a little bit of a lot of different types of credit, right? So, you know they want, they want you to say, Okay, we have fixed, we have revolve, and that type of thing. The big thing here that I thought that was kind of counterintuitive, is that the higher the number of counts, the better I would think, like, man, if you know, if I only had one or two, that would be a lot better from a from an agency perspective, or for a lender perspective, than if I had like 20. But what they what we have to remember is that your your your accounts, they own your report for 10 years. If they’re good, if you have if it’s negative, it stays on for seven years. So think about the last 10 years of all the different things that you’ve done, Credit Wise, that’s what they’re counting. For a lot of pharmacists, they get a number. They get in another account with every student loan. For a lot of us, like when we’re looking at a client’s credit report, particularly when we’re looking at student loans, it’s several pages longer than most people just because of the student loan burden. And the last thing that’s there is the hard inquiries, or, like, the new credits part of the score, and that’s also 10% so that’s where, you know what lenders don’t like to see is they want, the lower the amount, the better. So what they want to see, they don’t want you basically going around town, proverbially, going around town, like inquiring on additional lines of credit. So this results when you apply for credit. So if I go to buy a car and I’m buying it through Ford, they’re going to run my credit. That’s a hard inquiry. Or if I’m, if I’m getting a mortgage, or if I’m, you know, moving and I’m renting a place, they might run it a credit on there, and then, and then the utility. So they really like hard inquiries to be excellent is zero to one, good is one to two, and anything above that is fair. I could tell you, Tim, I have a crap ton of hard inquiry just because of the things that we’ve done over the years, that those typically fall off after two years, but that, and I think what they’re trying to do again is they’re trying to look at, okay, how much is this person actively accessing new credit now, I think, I believe that, I don’t know if it’s a week or two week, but say, like, I go and I apply for credit at Ford, Toyota, Tesla, they’ll group that, those hard inquiries into one, if it’s within like, a two, a one or two, yeah, so they don’t ding you on multiple I would, I would say, though, like you probably shouldn’t apply for credit for all of those, but that that’s what happens with those. So those are the kind of the big, the big factors that kind of play a part into your credit score. 

Tim Ulbrich  24:44

Great stuff. Quick summary, you mentioned five factors, payment history, credit utilization. Those together more than 60% so those are two big ones we want to pay attention to. The other three that are medium to low impact, age of credit history, total accounts, hard inquiries. I’m glad you mentioned the student loan piece, right? Because one of things I’ll often hear from new graduates that are learning about credit and trying to improve their credit, they’re like, oh, well, I haven’t had a credit card for that long, and they might only be thinking in that and that bucket, right? But if you have student loans, like you have multiple accounts on your credit report, and you’re going to start to establish the credit history as you pay those off, or you mentioned car notes, credit cards, obviously, there are other things there as well. Again, Tim, if we if we start to understand these, especially if I just focus on the first two for a moment, payment history, so on time payments, and then credit utilization, so the percentage of credit available that we’re actually using month to month. If we understand those and the large impact them at our credit score, we can really start to lean into strategies to address those, if they’re an issue, right? So I think about things like automatic payments, auto bill pay. Is that strategy? Yeah, with credit utilization, I know I’ve gone back about once a year, ish, maybe every 18, 24, months, to say, Hey, by the way, can we increase our credit limit? So asking for increases in credit limit now, understanding that that might have counted a hard inquiry, but asking for an increase in credit limit is then going to obviously drive down your utilization rate, unless your spending is going up, you know, at the same price. So these are some common things that we can think about, auto bill pay, asking for increases in credit limit if it makes sense that that can be favorable to our credit score. Yeah.

Tim Baker  26:20

Another, another thing you could do, like, again, if there’s parents out there of, like, kids that are starting to drive, I remember working with a pharmacist that I looked at their credit – I don’t know, they were probably born in like 1990 but their credit history stemmed back to like 1976 and I’m like, How is that possible? But their parents put them on like a Sunoco gas card. So that kind of give them an advantage, you know, early on, where, you know, typically, younger people have, you know, less than ideal credit scores. And as you get older, almost by osmosis, you know, you figure things out. And you know your accounts age, things like that, you have more of a history. But that was, you know, that’s a hack you mentioned, like, if I’m, if I’m in a good credit band, and maybe I should go through those Tim, but like a good credit band, you know, for scores, is anything excellent, is anything 750 or above. So, and I’m using FICO. FICO is, I think 90% of lenders use FICO. Vantage is another one that’s kind of come onto the scene, I think is used as well. I think they’re similar in this regard. But the score ranges anywhere from 300 to 850, anything above 750 is excellent. 700 to 749, is good. Fair Credit, 650 to 699, poor credit, 600 to 649, and anything lower than 600 is is bad. Now the average, when I look back at this in like 2018, I think the average scores was maybe like 693, in 2020 October, 2023, when I looked at this, it was like 717 which is interesting, because balances for credit, you know, for credit cards for Americans, are at all time high. Yeah, I know they’re trying to look at more like trended data. So like, if you’re if your balances are trending down versus like a snapshot. But I think it’s also important to know for people, like, what’s not used to calculate credit scores, age, sex, religion, race, marital status, zip code, if you’ve ever disputed things on a credit credit report, employment history, occupation and salary. So they don’t care if you make $200,000 or $2 million a year. It’s more about, again, your ability to be so we talk about this with the financial you know, income is not a financial plan. You know, income is not a good credit score. Sometimes people say like, oh, I make $300,000 my score should be great. They’re not. They’re not tied together. So I think it’s important to kind of understand that too, is like, what’s what’s not counted, and how  does that play a factor? 

Tim Ulbrich  28:47

And those, those may become a factor. I’m thinking about the impact the income specifically, right? If you’re, if you’re buying a home, obviously they’re looking at your credit score, but they’re looking at your debt to income ratio, in addition to the credit score as well. So alright, let’s shift gears and talk about top credit misperceptions. You gave an example of, you know, if you’re buying a car through Ford financing and you go through that application, that’s a hard inquiry, right? That might have a short term negative impact on your credit. Which leads me, I think, to one of the common misperceptions that people confuse, which is your credit score drops if you check your credit. So very different thing that we’re talking about here applying for credit versus checking your credit score. So that’s one of the most common misperceptions I hear is, hey, if I check my credit, it’s going to impact my credit score negatively. What other common misperceptions, Tim, are you typically hearing around credit?

Tim Baker  29:36

One of the big ones is like, oh, like, I’ve had this account. I’ve had this Abercrombie and Fitch credit card since, you know, I was in, you know, high school, like, should I close this account? Because this will improve my credit score? The answer is probably not, because that’ll actually ding you on your, you know, age of credit so, and I had one, I had one recently, where my my age of credit was really good, and I decided to. I had an old card. It wasn’t Abercrombie, it was something else, but I had this old car and I wasn’t using and I’m like, I’m just going to close it. I don’t have any credit decisions. And I closed it in my age of credit, took a took a hit. So, you know, that’s, that’s one of the things. You know, once you pay off an account with the derogatory markets removed from your credit report. So a lot of people like, Man, I missed the payment I got dinged and I have a 30 day lateness. Let me, let me pay it in full. And that’s going to basically go away, unfortunately, no, and I always talk about this when I talk, you know, there was a time where I did, I had this. you know, I ran my credit report, and in May of 2010, I had a 30 day pass, which I don’t know what happened there, and that stays on my credit report for seven years. So it fell off in 2017 but that was something that you know, a lender could say, you know, not so good. And I think what happens too, is, like some people, when they, you know, when they when they when maybe they’re spiraling, or they’re, they’re like, Oh, I missed it. They’re like, they kind of put their head in the sand and they like, they’re like, it is what it is. I’m not gonna be but like, those things cascade, right? So, you know, if you have a derogatory mark, like, that’s fine, but like, stem it, stem the stem the bleed in, right? You don’t want to go into a 60 day and 90 day to where you end up in collections. And I talked to pharmacists that this happens, right and that and like, to me, it’s like, all right, like, that’s in the past. Let’s like, let’s move forward. So, but that will stay on your on your record, on your credit report, for seven years. Another one I hear is like, hey, if I co sign, will that make me responsible for the account? That’s exactly what they do. So be wary when cousin Fred or brother Paul or someone else says, Hey, can you co sign this? Because you’re essentially, you know, from the from the lender perspective, they’re not putting all of their eggs in brother Paul’s or cousin Fred’s baskets. It’s now in your basket as well. So they look at this as a less risky but if your co signer acts a fool and kind of things go awry, you are on the hook for that. And you know, where we see this the most often is like parents co sign in student loans, right? So you want to make sure that you’re on your best behavior. So you don’t necessarily, you know, you know, affect your co signers credit and vice versa. You want to make sure that if you’re co signing for someone, they’re on their best behavior, so it doesn’t affect your credit. And probably the last thing up here, it’s like, oh, if I pay off this day, will I add I’m buying a house? Will I add 50 to, you know, 50 100, 150, doesn’t necessarily work like that. It’s not a it’s not a binary thing. It could help if it drops your your utilization. But it’s not necessarily like a, you know, a, you know, $1 for dollar, it’s going to, you know, increase, you know, your points, so to speak. So those are some of the misconceptions I hear, you know, the one that you brought up about like, hey, if I check myself, I don’t want to check it because I don’t want to like, affect it. If you’re applying and it’s hard, but even that, it’s 10% it’s not going to affect it that much. The big drivers are, are you paying your bills on time? And like, are you using a fraction of the credit that’s available to you? Those are going to be the big the big drivers of of this. 

Tim Baker  30:38

Tim, let’s wrap up by talking about credit security, and specifically, the difference between a credit freeze and a credit lock. I think these terms get, get thrown around a lot, perhaps interchangeably sometimes.

Tim Baker  33:27

So broad strokes, like, when, when you think about your credit like, before we get to the lock in the freeze, like, you want to monitor your credit, your credit report regularly, like, so, you know, typically, you know, if the clocks spring forward, they fall back. I think that’s a great time to do it. Admittedly, Tim has been a while since I checked mine. I actually looked at all three of them recently, because I just wanted to see how they’ve changed over the years. And you know, admittedly, I hadn’t run it. I probably ran it over the pandemic, because during the pandemic, they’re like, you can check it every month if you want. So I think monitoring is a good safeguard. I think that using strong passwords and enabling things like  two factor authentication will prevent, you know, some nefarious activity if people are trying to apply for credit in your name. So I think that’s a good thing. Setting fraud alerts, a lot of like, you know, banks now they’ll say, like, hey, we just saw Hey, Tim, did you buy that bottle of whiskey in Louisville because you live in Columbus? Like, yes, I did. Okay, get off my back. So. But a lot, you know, I’ll get an email from Credit Karma that says, like, hey, this, this happened is that is that, is that real or a bank? So, you know, credit cards do this too, so you want to be so if you can set fraud alerts, that’s good. Be cautious about sharing your personal information. Shred documents. So like, if you are, if you have documents that you get in the mail that have, like account numbers or social securities, don’t just put that in the trash can, like people take that and mine that data. So I think it’s important to you want to review bank statements, you know, credit card statements from time to time, just to make sure that that those are good to go. When we talk about the freeze, is probably the thing, right? I’m not a big like when I look think of a freeze and a lock the freeze is, I believe it’s legislated by Congress that you have to have the ability to freeze your credit, which means basically, no one can access your like, if you can authorize someone to pull your credit, but if you’ve already  frozen it, then, like, you actually have to unfreeze it before you do that. So I did that. I forgot about it. They’re like, Hey, we’re gonna pull your credit. I’m like, Cool. And they’re like, we can’t pull your credit. You have to unfreeze it. So I had to it, and it probably takes about 10 or 15 minutes on each end. So it’s kind of like, you know, you put in your identity, give a blood sample, no, I’m kidding, give a launch code. But it’s pretty it’s pretty onerous to kind of be able to freeze it and unfreeze it, so probably, like, 10 minutes on either side, if you are not making any type of like credit, granting decisions or applying for credit, freezing your credit as a normal part of your overall process should be you shouldn’t have frozen credit at all times. It can be a little bit of a pain. But if you’re not doing those things, freeze, it. The big difference between a freeze and a lock, as I understand it, is that locks are typically paid services by Equifax, Experian, TransUnion that are like, hey, for this extra fee per month, we can lock your credit and maybe you get a little bit more features. So I’m almost like, I’m good with the freeze, and that’s what I typically do. So I would say again, if you are not actively using credit, you want to have your credit frozen and then open it when you know when you do have that. Because Tim is really not a matter of, unfortunately, and I said this to a group of fellows the other day. They’re like, what? And I’m like, It’s true. It’s not a question of if your identity and some of your information is going to get stolen, it’s it’s when, in my opinion. Because you know, you have bad actors that can make a lot of money with your information, so the the more that you can do to proactively safeguard sensitive information and your credit is one of this the better, because I just think that it’s always this cat and mouse game of like, all right? Well, we do two factor, what’s the what’s the, how can we get around that, right? So I think the more that you do to safeguard your identity, your credit, the better. And I think a credit freeze is something that, and again, you can go on each of the reporting agencies and say, and they’ll walk you through how you can freeze and unfreeze it. And, yeah, another one I meant to mention, although I think one of them was hacked, was like, using a password, you know, like a like a Last Pass, or a OnePassword, things like that. I think LastPass was was hacked. But those are it. Those are better than if you’re the pharmacist that’s listening out there that has a note on their phone that that has their passwords, again, guilty as charged in the past, long ago, but you know, you want to have a password vault, so to speak, that you’re using that you know that is you’re using 12 plus characters and that type of thing.

Tim Ulbrich  38:21

Mike, our IT guy would be so proud, Tim, 

Tim Baker  38:25

Kudos to me. Yeah, exactly. 

Tim Ulbrich  38:27

Great stuff. We covered a lot. We talked about why credit matters as a part of the financial plan, how to understand and improve your credit score. We discussed some of the common misperceptions around credit and credit security as well. So our hope is to have this episode be one that we can link back to in the future. So as always, if you have some thoughts, ideas, topics you’d like to see, reach out to us [email protected] you can also go to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/ask, record a question. Let us know your thoughts. I will also put a plug next week. Our episode, a week from today, is going to be a special one. We’re bringing Joe Baker onto the show to talk about living and leaving a legacy. Joe Baker, many of you know that name. He’s the author of baker’s Dirty Dozen: Principles for Financial Independence, just a great individual, someone who’s a huge advocate for financial wellness, financial education, in the profession of pharmacy, and who is very philanthropic in his own right. And so we’re going to talk about why is giving an important part of his financial plan, and what are some of the areas of focus that he has had as he’s looking at making an impact today, leaving a legacy for tomorrow. So thank you so much everyone for listening. Have a great rest of your week, and we’ll catch you again next week. Take care.

Tim Ulbrich  39:34

As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only, and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archive, newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyzes expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 378: 10 Questions for Early Retirement


Tim Baker, CFP® tackles 10 questions for those considering early retirement from sources of income, handling market volatility, health insurance options and more.

Episode Summary

This week, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, RICP® and Tim Ulbrich, PharmD tackle 10 questions for those considering early retirement. They discuss sources of income in retirement, handling market volatility when no longer working, health insurance coverage options, timing to draw on Social Security, and much more.

About Today’s Guest

Tim Baker is the Co-Founder and Director of Financial Planning at Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 12,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. 

Tim attended the United States Military Academy majoring in International Relations and branching Armor. After his military career, he worked as a logistician with a major retailer and a construction company. After much deliberation, Tim decided to make a pivot in his career and joined a small independent financial planning firm in 2012. In 2016, he launched his own financial planning firm Script Financial and in 2019 merged with Your Financial Pharmacist. Tim now lives in Columbus, Ohio with his wife (Shay), three kids (Olivia, Liam and Zoe), and dog (Benji).

Key Points from the Episode

  • Early Retirement Goals and Challenges [0:00]
  • Defining Early Retirement [6:02]
  • Questions to Consider for Early Retirement [8:42]
  • Replacing Pharmacist Paychecks [17:41]
  • Health Insurance Coverage [24:17]
  • Dependents and Social Security Timing [31:08]
  • Inflation and Tax Planning [34:57]
  • Partner and Spouse Alignment [37:20]
  • Long-Term Care Planning [39:56]
  • Conclusion and Resources [44:58]

Episode Highlights

“I think there’s this misconception, or this illusion of control that we have over our retirement age. I think around 40% of people retire earlier than expected. It’s usually due to a medical issue with themselves or a family member, or could be something like a layoff. There is this illusion of control. Now, there are things that you can do to help with that. But a lot of the time we don’t have that.” – Tim Baker [4:59]

“Define retirement. I think for a variety of reasons this question is important, because for a lot of people, we think that retirement is the destination, but it’s really just the next chapter in the journey, right?” -Tim Baker [10:32]

“I think it is really important when we talk about this question: are we accounting for inflation? I think the best way to do that in a retirement setting is, as much of your dollars can come from Social Security as possible is great. But then also taking intelligent risk in the market, where the market is kind of performing in a way that kind of keeps pace or outpaces inflation is what we want.” – Tim Baker [36:25]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich  00:00

Hey everybody. Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, Tim Baker and I are tackling 10 questions regarding early retirement. We discuss sources of income in retirement, handling market volatility when no longer working, health insurance coverage options, timing to draw on Social Security and much more. And to supplement this week’s episode, we have a free resource for you to download: Retirement Roadblocks: Identifying and Managing 10 Common Risks. Because here’s the reality, when planning for retirement or early retirement, as we’ll discuss on today’s show, so so much attention is given to the accumulation phase, growing your assets. But what doesn’t get a lot of press is how to turn those assets into a retirement paycheck. And when building a plan to deploy your assets during retirement, it’s important to consider various risks to either mitigate or avoid altogether, and that’s what this free resource and guide is all about. It’s available for you to download at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retirement risks. Again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retirementrisks.

Tim Ulbrich  01:11

 Now, before we get started with the show, I want to let you know about our next YFP webinar coming up on October 7, at 9pm Eastern: Aliquot Investing: Small investments in Big Real Estate Investing. This free webinar led by YFP Real Estate Investing podcast co-hosts Nate Hedrick and David Bright explores how syndications fit into a well rounded real estate investment strategy, especially for busy pharmacists who don’t have time to source, vet and manage real estate investments. In this webinar, David and Nate will be joined by Alex Cartwright, PhD, and economist who has also led syndication projects, including one in which both David and Nate have invested themselves. You learn more about this webinar and register at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/syndication. Again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/syndication. 

Tim Ulbrich  01:59

All right, let’s get started with today’s show. Tim Baker, welcome back to the show.

Tim Baker  02:06

Yeah, good to be back. How’s it going, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich  02:07

It is going well. I’m excited. This week we’re talking about early retirement, which is something that I keep hearing more and more pharmacists expressing as a goal. And so Tim, I’m curious to hear from you before we get into the details of our discussion, is that something you’re hearing a lot of as you talk with pharmacists that are engaging with us to learn more about our services? Is early retirement coming up as a frequent goal? And what do you suppose might be driving some of that?

Tim Baker  02:37

Yeah, I think, I think for a lot of people, there’s a there’s this notion of, like, I’ll never be able to retire, you know, and a lot of it’s because of the student debt burden. I do hear on, you know, refrain of, I want to get to a point where I work because I want to, not because I need to. I only, I hear that almost verbatim a couple times a month from a prospective client. So the the notion of early retirement, I don’t, I don’t want to say it’s kind of in the forefront. Obviously, we do, you know, work with a lot of people that are interested in kind of the FIRE movement and what that looks like. But I think that there’s this shroud, maybe, of student debt, that it’s like, how do I even overcome this? And, you know, in a way that puts me in a place to retire, let alone retire early. So I think those that don’t have that, or have kind of navigated a plan for the loans. I think there’s a little bit more of like, sunny skies, but I wouldn’t say there’s a lot of people that are saying, like, I need to retire by, you know, this age. I think that that’s kind of few and far between. 

Tim Ulbrich  03:50

And for those that aren’t familiar with the FIRE term, we’ve talked about it on the show before, financial independence, retire early. Lots of resources out there that folks can learn more more about that. But I’m glad you mentioned, Tim the work because I want to not have to. That’s something I hear a lot as well. And, you know, I think for some people, they love the work that they do, and it brings them a ton of value. It brings them a sense of purpose and meaning. Perhaps others, you know, maybe early retirement is, hey, I want to get out of the stressful environment that I’m working in, and I don’t necessarily love the work that I do, but regardless of those desires, that work because I want to not have to is a thread that I think often comes out and within that I typically will hear, hey, I want to have flexibility. I want to have options. So, you know, maybe I get to a point that, hey, I’d like to work part time, or maybe something happens, you know, health wise, or with a family member, or something unexpected, or pursuing a passion project or hobby, whatever would be, the reason that their financial plan is in a position that, whether it’s something they can see or not see at this moment, that they have options if they need those options in the future.

Tim Baker  04:59

Yeah, I think there’s this, this misconception, or, like, this illusion of control that we have over our retirement age, which is, and I think it’s something like 40% I don’t have that stat in front of me, but I think it’s like 40% of people retire earlier than expected. It’s usually due to a medical issue with themselves or a family member, or could be something like a layoff, that type of thing. So there is this illusion of, like, I have control now, there are things that you can do to help with that, and to, you know, to build, you know, whether there’s something like really to consult in that you have that flexibility, or things like that that gives you a little bit more control. But a lot of the time we don’t have that. And that’s kind of an illusion that we think we have.

Tim Ulbrich  05:44

Since we’re going to use the term early retirement throughout the episode that that implies that there’s an accepted norm, maybe, of what retirement means. So when you hear early retirement, that term and throughout the discussion today, what? What are we referring to? What assumptions are we making? What defines early retirement?

Tim Baker  06:01

Yeah, to your point, Tim, I don’t know if there is an accepted, like, when we say early retirement, this is the age that we’re talking about. Yeah, if you look at it from like, Social Security, early retirement, as defined by Social Security as 62. So there’s really, there’s really a couple ages related to Social Security. It’s your early retirements at 62, your full retirement age, which is different for a lot of people. Most people, it’s going to be 67 and then you have delayed retirement a that’s typically 70. So early retirement in the Social Security system is 62 and you can’t collect the benefit before that. The age that I think of like if you were to say, hey, I want to retire early. The age that I think of is 59 and a half years old. So why do I think of 59 and a half years old? The reason for that is all those retirement accounts, a 401K, an IRA or Roth IRA, they they’ll have basically guidelines to say if you take money out before 59 and a half years old, you’ll be, you know, penalized. Unless there’s, there’s exceptions to that, but you’ll be penalized by 10%. So that’s typically the the age that I’ll use. So like, if you were to say, Hey Tim, I want, you know, I want to retire early, and I would say, Well, what is that? If you say 55 then between 55 and 59 and a half years old, we have to figure out an income stream that’s probably not going to come out of your 401K or, you know your other retirement accounts. So that’s what I typically will use in my brain. I think you know, if you talk to people in the fire community and you say 50-59 and a half? That’s probably not early retirement for them. So those are kind of the few, the few dates, or the few ages that jump out to me when we have this discussion. But I think for all intents and purposes, it’s 59 and a half for me. 

Tim Ulbrich  07:55

I think the same thing. And I agree. I think some of the FIRE enthusiasts, although there’s many different flavors of FIRE, right? But the FIRE enthusiasts, a lot of people might think a early retirement, you know, late 30s, early 40s, right? Type of ages that you typically see. But I think 59 and a half, for the reason you mentioned is, is what often comes up. The other one 62. You mentioned social security. When could I draw Social Security? 65 Medicare, that often comes up. You know, we’ll talk about health insurance. So the point being is, as we say all the time on the show, we’ve got to have intentionality on like, what’s the goal? What’s the purpose? Why is this a goal? If it’s a goal for you, and then we can start to plan around that, like, what does that mean to you? You know, is it 59? Is it 54 and for what reason? And then what does that mean in terms of various savings accounts? So let’s jump in. We’re going to talk about 10 questions that we think are important questions to consider for folks that are thinking about early retirement. And that could be someone listening and says, Hey, I know I want to early retire and I’ve set that date. Or it could be folks that are just thinking about this as something that they’re they’re curious about and want to learn more. As we go through these 10 questions, the intent is not that we’re going to cover each one of these areas in a significant amount of depth. We’ll reference other resources that we have on each one of these topics as we go throughout but really to introduce the question and get you thinking about these different areas as it relates to early retirement. So Tim, the first question that I think is important for folks to consider is, Will I work at all during retirement? Right? And as obvious as that sounds, I think if, if people are thinking of very traditional retirement, it’s, hey, we work for 30, 40, years, and then we don’t work at all. But for others, it may be that we work part time. And pharmacists, I think, are in a unique position where they have more of the opportunity to work part time, work as a contractor, versus other professions out there. So why is this question, will I work at all during retirement so important?

Tim Baker  09:52

And I think, like, if we’re defining early retirement, I think you can even define like retirement. I think so many people, in a traditional sense, they. Think of retirement as, you know, you punch the clock the last time, and then the next day, you’re sitting on a beach or you’re up somewhere, and that’s it, right? And, you know, a lot of people, especially in the fire movement, when they talk about, you know, financially independent, retire early, I think the retire, I think that’s what rubs people the wrong way, is because they overlay that traditional picture of retirement into that paradigm. And a lot of people are saying like, Well, we are still working, we’re just working our on our own terms, right? So I think for, I think for a variety of reasons, like this question is important, because I think for a lot of people, we think that retirement is the destination, but it’s really just the next chapter in the journey, right? And so much of our, for a lot of people, so much of our identity is wrapped up into our role as a pharmacist or whatever we’re doing, and once that like is gone, that can be jarring for a lot of people. So it’s not just a monetary thing. So to me, I think this is where some life planning really gets in, gets you know, it would be really important is, you know, okay, if we don’t have to work, we truly don’t have to work. What are we doing? You know, are we volunteering? Are we taking care of grandkids? Are we getting into hobbies? Are we traveling? You know, there’s a lot of stats that say, if you work, the longer that you work, the more you know, the better your retirement will be. In terms of, like, the financial planning part of it, because you’re just delaying a lot of the things that work, you know, for you, whether that’s health insurance or whether that’s income, things like that. But it’s also like, you know, your social circles are often connected to your work in a lot of ways, like if that goes away. So to me, this is really important to kind of, I think, look at it both from a dollars and cents perspective, Tim, but also like the social aspect of who are you post, you know, full time pharmacist, you know, and looking in the mirror and doing some deep digging of, like, what does what does this actually look like? So I think it’s an important question to ask. 

Tim Ulbrich  12:14

I agree, and I’m glad you mentioned, you know, what does this look like? But how I be spending my time? It’s actually not one of the other questions we had. So we’ll kind of knock both of those out, knock both of those out together. But this is one of those things that we, myself included, we have this idea of what retirement might look like. That could be how our parents have gone through that phase, or grandparents, maybe what we see on commercials, whatever. But taking it to the next step of, what does a day look like? I’ve heard people go through this exercise. You mentioned the life plan, which I thought was great, and having some clarity there, but going through the exercise of actually, like mapping out for a month, like, what would I be doing on a Monday at 11 o’clock, right? On a Tuesday at four o’clock? And you know, not that you have to get that granular per se, but the idea is a good one, that right now you think about the percentage of your schedule that is occupied by work, and especially, I think about folks, Tim, in our phase of life where it’s work, and young kids like, that’s a big chunk of our time, right? And if you fast forward to a date and time where we’re not working, and the kids out of the house, Whoa, that is a big gap of time. So what are we doing with that time? What are the goals you mentioned? You know, is it travel? Is it volunteering? Is it spending time with with the grandkids? Like, what does that rich life look like in retirement? And the second layer I would add to that, Tim, is, if there’s a partner, spouse, significant other involved, like, what does that look like for the individual and then for the we. You know, Jess and I were joking recently that, like we love spending time together, but we also have individual things that we love to do. And I very much see in retirement that we’ll have things that we want to do together, whether that be volunteering or traveling or other things, and then we’ll have other things where it’s like, she’s doing her thing, I’m doing my thing. So, yeah, I think that discussion of, what does this look like for I and what does this look like for we as well?

Tim Baker  14:06

Well, especially in retirement, as you age, like, one of the things that you know, often doesn’t get talked about, and it’s a risk in retirement is loss of spouse, and a lot of it’s it comes from the perspective of, like, loss of a social security check and things like that. But what about like, you know, I look at my parents, love my parents, but my dad doesn’t have his own interest, like, he just kind of does what my mom wants to do. So like, if he were to lose my mom, like, like, what happens, you know? And so I think, like, that’s, that’s a big thing. And, yeah, in the, in the life planning, we go through an exercise called ideal schedule. So you go through and you say, Okay, what’s the ideal day, from the moment you wake up, from the moment that you, you know, put your head on the pillow, then what’s the ideal week? So Monday through Sunday, like, what are we doing? And then it goes out to the ideal year. Like, are you spending, you know, the summertime up North, or are you, you know, are you visiting family, those types of things? And I think that for a lot of people, you know, they realize how much of their day is tied into work, and then once, once that’s gone, like, what happens? So, yeah, those are the exercises. I mean, we’ve talked about, like, the three questions, and I think those are all, you know, important things to kind of reference back to and revisit, especially as you’re going through the next, like, phase of your life. But I think really put pen to paper and I’ve talked about this, I think with you. I don’t know if I’ve ever talked about on the podcast, but like, when I did my sabbatical, I had a month off where I did not touch work, and I kind of had a little bit of like, what am I doing? Like, like, how am I gonna, like, fill the day, which sounds crazy, but like it was a struggle for me, and like I wanted to make the best use of the time, but I also felt like I had some constraints here and there, but like that, that little window was, like, important for me to kind of put myself in someone’s shoes who’s kind of going through that transition. And it sounds silly, but it’s it’s not.

Tim Ulbrich  14:34

That’s a good point, though. I’ve actually heard people talk about, I’m thinking back to the interview that I did on episode 291 with Dave Zgarrick, who is has made that transition in retirement. And he talked about redefining retirement, really thinking about as like a half time to kind of reassess where are we going. Why are we going here? What does this look like? But I think some of those break periods, you know, you mentioned the sabbatical, other people talk about mini retirements. I think it’d be really helpful to having some of these experiences where we get a feel for what this might look like. And you know what? What are some of the ahas of how I do want to spend my time, or what the gaps are in time? I mean, joking aside, we’re just in a phase of life, both of us right now, we’re really sun up to sundown. You know, it’s work, kids, that’s the schedule. 

Tim Baker  16:08

I made the comment like, hey, we haven’t, like, Shay and our kids haven’t really hung out with you and Jess and your boys in a while. And I think I would just look at our schedule and it’s like, soccer, football, swim, soccer, football, swim. Like, it’s just, it’s just so many things that are going on, but eventually that’s going to go away, right to your point, like, that’s, that’s going to be in our rearview mirror. And that’s why, I think, like, even, even couples, sometimes, because they’re so in their, you know, in their kids, you know, activities in their lives that they almost forget about each other. You know, spouses and that can be, you know, I think there is a pretty high level of, you know, divorce and things like that as you, as you age, because you kind of lose that connection with your spouse. And I think that’s important to make sure that you’re continuing to kindle so all these things kind of play into it.

Tim Ulbrich  17:38

So that’s our first two questions, will I work at all during retirement? How I be spending my time? The third question, Tim is, how will I replace my pharmacist paycheck? Again, seems like an obvious question, but for decades, we have a an employer that’s paying us on a monthly basis. And if we were to stop work altogether, again, that may or may not happen, but if we’re to stop working, we’ve got to make our own paycheck at this point. So we’ve talked about this on the show show before. We’ll link to that in the show notes. But thoughts on this question of, how will I replace my pharmacist paycheck?

Tim Baker  18:10

Yeah, I don’t really think, I don’t really think a lot changes here. I think what, what is, what does change in terms of, like, the sources, I think what does change is kind of like, where in early retirement? Where do they come like, where does the money come from? So, you know, if we’re retiring at 55 the the sources of your income is probably going to be from part time employment. It could be from your traditional portfolio, but from, like, a brokerage account that doesn’t have the 59 and a half, you know, 10% penalty, which you have to build, right? So lot of people, they’re really set on, you know, they’re 401, K and their Roth IRA and things like that, which is really important. But the third bucket, so that we have the pre, pre tax after tax. The third bucket is the taxable, which is going to be in an early retirement bucket. So I would say probably those are the two big things for most people. Would be part time employment, and then, like a brokerage account, or like traditional savings. If you’re in the real estate, it could be rental income or liquidation of like a rental property. But then as you age, you know, the things that kind of get the green light are Social Security. You know, if you decide to collect that at 62 or you wait to 67 or even later to 70, and then getting into, once you’re past 59 and a half, you know, the traditional portfolio where you don’t get that 10% haircut, you know, you can start, you know, distributing from a 401K, IRA, etc. There are other things out there, like annuities. It could be, it could be a pension. You know, if you have a company or government pension, which we know aren’t necessarily, you know, a thing that a lot of people have, but that’s typically based on an age that you can, you know, get to that. It could be, you know, tapping into the value of your home, things like reverse mortgages, which get a nasty reputation, or selling a business, or could be cash value life insurance. But I would say the heavy hitters here, especially early on, it’s going to be part time employment. It’s going to be things like a brokerage account savings, and then, you know, potentially, you know, real estate, things like that. 

Tim Ulbrich  20:08

And as you mentioned, especially with the brokerage account, especially with real estate, there’s planning that has to be done there, right, for us to be able to accrue those savings, to tap into those in early retirement. So, you know, early planning, of course, really important here, and when we talk about priority of investing, this is always the one asterisk, right? Hey, if you’re if you’re thinking about early retirement, you know this sequence changes when we think about more the traditional buckets, like the 401K, 403B’s, IRAs, etc, because of that 59 and a half restraint that you mentioned earlier. Tim, number four on our list is, hey, what if there’s a market downturn early on in my early retirement? So I’ve decided to retire early. You know, let’s say there’s a market downturn and we experience some of that volatility, that that can be disruptive to the nest egg. Always a problem, but maybe more of a problem here if we’ve got a longer runway of years that we need those funds in retirement.

Tim Baker  21:06

Yeah. So what we’re talking about here is sequence risk, or sequence of returns risk, which, which is the potential negative impact that the order of your returns, your investment returns, on your portfolio due to the market, is heightened, especially in the withdrawal phase. So if you take and I’ll run through this, I know we don’t have a ton of time, but I wanted to kind of, I feel like we’ve talked about sequence risk, but I haven’t really talked through, like a scenario. So I actually did a scenario where we have one where it’s favorable returns, so like double digit returns, like the second that you retire. And then one that is like negative returns. So, and then what does the, what does the outcome look like at the end of I did it for like a 10 year period. So if you look at, if we start with a million dollars, and you have an annual withdrawal of 50,000, which is 5% and we have a, you know, we’re doing this over 10 years. If we go into the first year of favorable the favorable scenario, the first year, we get a 15% return, 12% return, 8% return, even taking out 50, you know, and over the 10 years, it’s like 4.7% in aggregate, a return. At the end of the 10 years, you’re gonna have $1.2 million. So early on we’ve got, you know, the first, you know, three years, you know, 30 some odd percent. If we look at the same thing, instead of getting positive 15, we get negative, you know, negative 15, negative 12. That same portfolio, even over the 10 years, which is going to get a 4.7% return, is going to end with 361,000. So it’s almost a million dollar swing. So it’s the same aggregate, you know, 10 year, you know, return. But after the first year, for the favorable, you end with 1.085 million. After the first year, you end with $800,000. So you’ve taken off 15% because that’s your that’s basically the market downturn, but you’ve also withdrawn $50,000. So that’s what we’re talking about here with sequence of return risk is that the timing of when you retire is probably one of the most important things related to the market. So what we’ve always said is like flexibility here. So if the market is tanking, it might be worth to, like, work another year, and most of the time, like, you know, in this scenario, we have, you know, four years minus 15, minus 12, minus eight, minus five. Typically, the market doesn’t do that. You know, we don’t have, you know, consecutive years, maybe two, maybe three of year. But like, this is where, you know, pushing that out and having flexibility of like, okay, maybe I’m not going to retire at, you know, 53 I’m going to retire at 56. I’m going to retire at 57. That type of thing. So that, to me, is really important, and that, and that speaks to the the timing of the investment returns that you’re getting. Now, the ways to combat this is, which is really hard, is, is really to kind of be more conservative, take your money from, you know, equities to bonds or even cash. But the problem with that is, you know, nobody has, like, a, you know, a crystal ball to say, like, when’s the best time to do that? So that’s, that’s kind of sequence, risk at play.

Tim Ulbrich  24:20

Number five on our list, Tim, I alluded to this a little bit earlier, is what will I do for health insurance coverage? We’re not yet at the age of 65 we can’t necessarily put Medicare into play. We no longer have employer coverage if, if we’re working part time or not working at all. You know what options are we thinking about here and and obviously we’ve got to factor this in as a cost as well.

Tim Baker  24:42

Yeah. So I mean, unfortunately, and we’ve kind of bemoaned this fact being business owners, there’s not a great option here. You know, I think you know, looking at employer sponsored COBRA coverage, but that only typically lasts 18 months, and that’s really expensive because you’re paying the full premium. If you have a spouse that you can ride his or her coattails, that’s one way to do it. It could be private health insurance. So looking, you know, at the exchanges, things like healthcare sharing ministries like that, that might be something. I know you looked at those in the past. It could be, you know, there are some, and I don’t know if Starbucks still does this, but I remember a lot of people. I think my sister worked for Starbucks, you know, when she was in college, just to get in, you know, insurance through them, she was working part time. It could be Medicaid if you don’t have assets, like, if, you know, I would say that you probably shouldn’t be retiring if that’s the case. Or just, like, short term plans that provide, like, temporary coverage. So probably, for most people, it’s going to be looking at the exchanges and trying to trying to find the best, you know, probably catastrophic plan that they can. But unfortunately, there isn’t really a great, you know, a great solution here to kind of bridge you before you get to 65 to get to Medicare, you know, yeah, it’s, it’s kind of, you know, pick your poison, so to speak.

Tim Ulbrich  26:00

You know that you mentioned the Starbucks, there’s actually a FIRE pathway, barista fire that’s named after that, that play, right? Which is, you know, working part time at a place like Starbucks or a place that has those benefits to be able to get access to those. You know, the other other comment I’d make here, Tim is, I think while these costs are very real, like, we have to put them as objectively in play as possible. What I mean by that is, like, if you’ve done a good job and the dollars are there, like, even if this feels scary or you don’t want to spend money on it, like, if the math supports it, like you just factored into the plan, right? I’ve seen some people, I think, talk about this as like, Oh, I’ve had employer coverage my whole life. I’m three years away from Medicare. I’m done working. I’m over it. Don’t need it, you know. Don’t want to be working anymore, but I’m gonna wait till I get to 65. And maybe that’s the play. But if the nest egg is there, like, we just need to factor this in as an expense and consider it. I mean, the other note and comment I’d make here, back to our discussion of early planning with something like a brokerage account. This would be another play of early planning with something like HSA contributions, where, you know, can we be accruing and saving money in HSA throughout our career, such that one of these instances here, we’re talking about early retirement. We’ve got some dollars that are earmarked specifically for that, that we don’t have to have to necessarily draw separately from our portfolio.

Tim Baker  27:21

That’s right, yeah. HSA would be a great bucket for this, because it has the triple tax benefit, but the flexibility to be able to use for you know, now and later. So yeah, that’s a great bucket for that.

Tim Ulbrich  27:34

Number six is, are my dependents independent? And if not, have I factored that into my planning and assumptions? Tim lots to think about here, kids and elderly parents, but looking at dependence and cost of dependence.

Tim Baker  27:48

Yeah, this is, um, this is, this is kind of hard too, because, you know, I always joke with my with my kids, that, you know, they they need to move out so I can, you know, turn their room into a a whiskey room. And, you know, my kids are 10 and five or whatever. Obviously, Zoe’s always younger, but I think this is hard, because I think we are all trying to prepare our kids to kind of launch, right? But, you know, oftentimes they come back. And you know, we have to kind of figure out what that looks like. So that could be, you know, it could be for kids managing, like, their college and expenses related to that. But then after, like, if they don’t get a job, or if they’re not, you know, able to support themselves. Like, what are the, what are the rules around rent and things like that, and just, how does that affect your overall financial plan? And then elderly parents, there’s a lot of, you know, pharmacists that we work with that they say, I am my parent’s retirement plan. Like, that’s the thing, right? And, and I respect that, you know, a lot of it’s like, Hey, I’m a first generation immigrant. You know, they’re you know, they’re sacrificed to get over here. And my sacrifice is kind of making sure that they’re okay, you know, in retirement. So, you know, we have this term called the sandwich generation. It typically is, you know, people in their 40s and 50s that are taking care of, like adult children, but they’re also taking care of, like elderly parents. That’s a big thing. And again, like, I would say, it kind of goes back to when we talk about, like, education planning, like you have to put your mask on first and then put on the mask of your child. I don’t think that ever goes away. So I think that, you know, this can be an unexpected thing for a lot of parents, but you know it can, really, especially like elderly plant parents, if you’re the one that’s kind of, you know, caring for them, and these are often the things that kind of force can force a retirement early for you is that you’re taking care of other people, right? So I think having these conversations with, you know, your kids, with your elderly parents and and come up with a plan and kind of ground rules. I think is really important. So we can kind of include this in the plan and know, you know, when does zig and zag?

Tim Ulbrich  30:06

Yeah, Tim, anytime we talk about this topic, always comes to mind conversation we had with Cameron Huddleston on the show a couple times, who wrote the book, Mom and Dad, We Need to Talk. And, you know, in the context of elderly parents, this is where those conversations are so important, as uncomfortable as they may be, right? Because, you know, I’m thinking about even discussions I’ve had with my parents about, you know, what does their financial position look like? What are their retirement goals? What are their desires for, you know, staying in the home versus other living arrangements. What is their long term care insurance policy look like? And, you know, part of those conversations, obviously, is focused in a genuine care and desire of what, what do my parents want? But there’s also a reality of like that may impact our financial plan, and that’s not being selfish, like we’re just trying to be responsible. And I think you know, if we can get into those open conversations, we can start to plan around that a little bit, to understand what the impact may or may not be of that situation with parents on our financial plan. 

Tim Baker  31:05

That’s right.

Tim Ulbrich  31:06

Number seven, we touch on this a little bit. Tim, but when will I draw on Social Security? We talked before in episode 294 about common Social Security mistakes to avoid, and a big part of that discussion was around when we opt into starting Social Security benefits. For someone who’s saying about early retirement, you know, and building that retirement paycheck, a Social Security benefit might, might be an important part of that, and the temptation, perhaps could be there to start those benefits early and just understanding what the impact of that could be versus a delayed benefit selection. So thoughts here on this question of, when will I draw? 

Tim Baker  31:41

I think a lot of financial planners are, you know, coming around to the fact that, like, if you can delay your Social Security benefit as long as possible, the better knows for the the overall plan. And I know this, to your point, it can be if you’re, if you’re working for or if you’re, if you’re retired for, you know, 10 years or whatever it is, and your funds are dwindling in some of those, you know, brokerage accounts or savings. I think it can be tempting to to draw earlier, right? But I think if you look at the math, and I have, you know, I think I pulled, I think this is from my Social Security statement. If you look at my Social Security statement. If I were to retire at 62 my monthly benefit would be $1,826. if I were to retire at not full Social Security age, but 65 it would be $2290. If I then go to 67 which is my full retirement age, it goes to $2662. If I delay it till age 70 so I’m getting those deferment credits, it goes to $3,306. So the spectrum of early at 62 is $1826, to delayed is $3307.  But the big thing here, Tim, that doesn’t get enough press, is that it’s inflation protected, which there’s no other pension or annuity out there that you can get that does that. So one of the big hang ups for for retirees is like, I’m working on a fixed income. I’m working on a fixed income. But once you know inflation takes over, as we’ve seen in recent years, that really, like, you know, provides pressure on, okay, how am I going to let you know, how I’m going to make this, you know, these dollars last. So that would be the thing that I would implore, you know, people, when they’re looking at their, you know, their, their benefit for Social Security is, you know, if we’re planning this, can we plan to at least get the full retirement age, or, you know, can we delay it from 62 to 67 at least, to get from, you know, an $1,800 benefit to a almost $2,700 benefit because this will pay you out for the rest of your life, which we don’t know what that is, inflation protected. And that’s where you see that exponential benefit versus, you know, if you, if you, if you peg it at $1,800. So it’s still inflation protected, but I think you want that, that percent of your paycheck to be as high as possible that is covered by, you know, the Social Security and Inflation. So it’s really, it’s a really important discussion to have. 

Tim Ulbrich  34:21

Tim, it’s a good plug and a reminder for folks, if they’re not already doing this, to check out their My Social Security account ssa.gov just to dig into that report, what are the expected benefits? Always a good thing to build into. I typically try to check it in just once a year, kind of see what’s going on. So since you mentioned inflation, Tim, let’s jump down to that one, and that question being, have I accounted for inflation? You mentioned social security being inflation protected, but really nothing else beyond that. So, you know if we think of inflation as of late, which has been higher than historically, although that’s come down, you know, more recently, but even the historical rate of inflation, if we’re retiring, let’s say, in our early 50s and were afforded the opportunity to live into our 90s, like costs are going up right significantly over that time period. So the question here is, have I accounted for inflation when I’m looking at these early retirement numbers?

Tim Baker  35:13

Yeah, and one of the best ways to account for inflation as retire is to be in a you know, is, have some of your your assets in equities, right? Which gets scary, because then we talk about, you know, the sequence of return risk. But I think, really, for a portfolio to endure 30, 40, 50, 60, years is, is to make sure that you’re taking, you know, intelligent risk in the market. So you know, we just got news of the rate cut yesterday, and immediately, you know, you’re seeing like our cash account at our custodian went from 5.1% which is really solid, to 4.6%. So savers, and often, you know, people that have reached you know that are in retirement have a good amount of cash, or they should, because, you know they’re they’re basically taking slugs of cash out to basically build their paycheck. That’s going to affect them potentially negatively. Now, you know interest rates, you know in inflation, sometimes, you know we’ll see interest rates go go down, but we won’t see like the cost of goods go down because they’re pegged that we talked about that in previous episodes, they’re kind of pegged at that high watermark. So I think is really important, you know, when we talk about this question is, you know, are we accounting for inflation? I think the best way to do that in a retirement, you know, setting is, again, as much as your dollars can come from Social Security as possible is great. But then also taking, you know, intelligent risk in the market, where, you know, the market is kind of, you know, performing in a way that kind of, you know, keeps pace or outpaces inflation, you know, is what we want. So, you know, on the so that’s, that’s kind of on the asset side, but then on the debt side, you know, just making sure that, you know, we’re, we’re efficient, you know, there with with rates and where inflation is as well. So I think it’s important to, you know, for retirees that are potentially living on a fixed income to account for, and a lot of people this, and really, taxes. Tim, it’s kind of like, can be a second, you know, an afterthought.

Tim Ulbrich  37:20

Good point on the taxes, probably a whole separate episode, yeah, around like, tax planning and early retirement. Um, number nine on our list is, is my partner spouse significantly now they’re on the same page. We already talked about this in the context of, hey, what does that, you know, schedule look like? What does that ideal life, that rich life, look like in retirement? And, you know, what’s the I? What’s the we? But I think it’s also just a bigger question of, like, are we on the same page with this concept of early retirement, and maybe, if one spouse wants to work longer than another and one’s having to draw down from their assets, like, are we good with that? You know, does that jive? 

Tim Baker  37:55

And I think, I think this kind of starts with, you know, where are we at and where are we going? So you know, when we do this with clients, we we call the first meeting, Get Organized where, you know, we’ve plugged everything into our client portal, checking, savings, credit cards, student loans, investment accounts, value, the house, the mortgage, all the things, right? And for a lot of people, it’s the first time they’ve seen their stuff all in one spot, right? Because we bank over here, we have debt over here, we have investments over here, and then for spouses, that’s also true, right? Because I don’t necessarily see everything that Shay has, you know, if I’m not tuned in. So if we plug that all into one platform, we can kind of see the landscape of where we’re at, and then I think from there, once we establish where we’re at, we talk about where we where we’re going. And then I think this is some of these questions that come up is like, okay, Shay, if I retire and you’re still working for 10 years, like, Are you cool with that? Probably not, right. So I think those that’s the space to have the conversation again. I’m biased, Tim, right? Because, you know, we’re planners, but sometimes these are hard to have with your spouse. So having that third party, like the independent third party that has your best interest, that can ask questions, is, I think, a safe place so to speak, to have these conversations. Because, you know, if Shay says I’m going to retire early and you can keep working. I’m going to say, Yeah, that’s cool, whatever. But maybe I have some resentment about that, you know, and I think if you’re in a in a place where, you know, it’s safe, and we can kind of talk these out and get on the same page, it’s really important because, you know, we’re trying to row this boat in the same direction. And if, you know, if we’re just, you know, having these service conversations and not really getting, you know, into depth, then we’re just kind of spinning in a circle. So I think it’s really important to to make sure you know, and this goes back to life planning, to make sure that you know your vision of early retirement, you know, overlaps. It doesn’t have to be the same, yeah, but it overlaps with your spouse or with your partner to make sure that you know your needs are taken care of, but also your spouse’s needs are taken care of. 

Tim Ulbrich  40:08

What came to mind, Tim, as you’re talking about, is my I think my parents, to their credit, have done a really good job of this. My mom’s been retired now for a few years, and my dad has no plans in the near future retire. He just loves his work. It’s energizing, and he acknowledges maybe that will change at some point in the future when it does, and maybe it looks part time or consulting or whatever, but they have kind of figured out like for them individually. My mom, you know, has a ton of joy that she gets from just the daily rhythms and routines that she has, and it doesn’t mean my dad has to be doing the same thing. So I don’t think there’s a right or wrong here. It’s more about what works for you as a couple. And as you mentioned, having some of those conversations to avoid, or try to avoid, as much as you can, some of the resentment or other feelings that might come up along the way. All right, our last question, number 10 on this list of 10 questions to consider for early retirement is, am I prepared for potential long term care expenses? Tim, we talked about Medicare already briefly, but here we’re talking about some of the significant expenses that can come beyond what Medicare may cover, and specifically here thinking about long term care insurance, we talked about this on episode 296, we’ll link to that in the show notes. Your thoughts here on, am I prepared for potential long term care expenses?

Tim Baker  41:25

Yeah. So I think the stat is, is that you know, a person that’s age 65 is going to spend $157,500 on health care and medical expenses, you know, throughout the course of their life, a couple of $315,000. So you know, and this doesn’t necessarily include the cost of, like, long term care. So when we talk about long term care, this is really, you know, help with kind of the the daily living thing. So like being able to get out of bed, you know, move around your house, use the bathroom, dress, feed yourself, but also kind of more like, you know, cognitive things like being able to pay bills, or, you know, shop so, you know, oftentimes, and actually one of the biggest, the biggest cause for, like, you know, a long term care policy to get triggered, is Alzheimer’s. But the second one is, the second biggest is arthritis, Tim, believe it or not. So, you know, a lot this is one of those things. It’s like, Ah, this will never happen to me, or I don’t got to worry about that, or I’ll figure this out later. But you know, it’s, it’s one of those biases that we have that, you know, it often can come and bite us in the rear end. So what we talk about with long term care is, there’s, there’s really two ways to prepare for this. One is to self insure. So just like we’re talking about being able to, like, pay our own health care and things like that, this is kind of, this is not that. This is where we’re basically saying we’re going to forego a policy. We’re basically going to, you know, if this comes up, we’re going to reach into our own pocket, reach into our own portfolio, and pay for the care that we need. The alternative, and what I would recommend, is purchasing a long term care insurance policy where it really affords you access to benefits that allow you, at a minimum, to age in place. So these, you know, there’s studies that show that, you know, couples are willing to spend, you know, $2500 to $3,000 a year on a long term care policy. And you can get a policy that you know can kind of get you a basic, a basic policy that will have, you know, someone come in the home, or things like that. I think a lot of people, when they think of long term care, they think of like, of like a nursing home and things like that. This is really trying to, you know, get, get a policy that provides benefits that can bring people into your home to assist you as you age. So, you know, there’s typically a Goldilocks zone. Is that you should start, you know? So we talk about early retirement, you should start discussing this, probably in your 40s and 50s, start really assessing it in your 50s. And the kind of, the sweet spot the purchase of policy is, like, early 60s, yeah. So this is really important, because, again, like the once you once you kind of go into, like, a facility, if that, if that’s the case, like, that’s where expenses can get really astronomical. So the longer that you can stay in place and have the help that you need, the better, I think it is for you from a psychological perspective, but also from a financial perspective. And again, this is one of the ones. It’s like, like, not going to happen to me, Tim. I think important to look at. And I think we look at these policies as almost as like a a coupon for future care. So, like, hey, you know, if I get a benefit, that’s $3,000 a month, but you know what I need is $4000 then I’m only reaching in my pocket $1000 bucks to kind of cover down on the difference.

Tim Ulbrich  44:54

Again, episode 296, five key decisions for long term care insurance recovered that topic in depth. We’ll link to that in the show notes. Tim, great stuff. And one thing I would say to our listeners, early retirement or not, we touch on a lot of areas of the financial plan. We talked about the importance of having a life plan, having the vision for where we’re going, why we’re going there. We talked about building a retirement paycheck. We touched on insurance, Social Security, investing priorities and decisions to make around investing and how to prioritize different parts of the investing plan. And at YFP, this is what our team of certified financial planners and tax professionals do. We support pharmacists at every stage of their careers to take control their finances, reach their financial goals and build wealth through comprehensive – looking at all the different areas we discussed – fee only, financial planning and tax planning. And we’d love to have an opportunity to talk with you, to learn more about your situation, to learn more about our services. Determine if there’s a good fit. You can book a free discovery call with Tim by visiting yourfinancialpharmacist.com top of the page there, you’ll see an option to book a discovery call. Thanks so much everyone for listening. We’ll catch you again next week.

Tim Ulbrich  46:01

As we conclude this week’s podcast an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts, is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyzes expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer, thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 377: 10 Moves to Make to Become Financially Fit


Gathering wisdom from his own journey and those of many other pharmacists, Tim Ulbrich, YFP CEO, shares ten moves that are key in building a strong financial foundation.

Episode Summary

YFP CEO and Co-Founder, Tim Ulbrich, distills the lessons learned from his own financial journey and from speaking with thousands of pharmacists about their financial plans into a list of ten moves that are key in building a strong financial foundation. 

Whether you’re just getting started and have the opportunity to build a strong foundation from the beginning or you’ve been at it for a while and sense the need to reinforce that foundation, this week’s episode is for you.

About Today’s Guest

Tim Ulbrich is the Co-Founder and CEO of Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 15,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. To date, YFP has partnered with 75+ organizations to provide personal finance education.

Tim received his Doctor of Pharmacy degree from Ohio Northern University and completed postgraduate residency training at The Ohio State University. He spent 9 years on faculty at Northeast Ohio Medical University prior to joining Ohio State University College of Pharmacy in 2019 as Clinical Professor and Director of the Master’s in Health-System Pharmacy Administration Program.

Tim is the host of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast which has more than 1 million downloads. Tim is also the co-author of Seven Figure Pharmacist: How to Maximize Your Income, Eliminate Debt and Create Wealth. Tim has presented to over 200 pharmacy associations, colleges, and groups on various personal finance topics including debt management, investing, retirement planning, and financial well-being.

Key Points from the Episode

  • Financial Moves to Build a Strong Foundation [0:00]
  • Commitment to Living Off Less Than You Make [4:05]
  • Building an Emergency Fund [5:59]
  • Developing a Plan to Eliminate High-Interest Debt [10:17]
  • Determining the Best Student Loan Repayment Strategy [12:07]
  • Tracking Net Worth and Understanding Insurance Needs [14:53]
  • Starting to Invest Early and Often [19:03]
  • Refusing to Accept a Fixed Income [20:04]
  • Implementing Systems and Automation [21:30]
  • Conclusion and Encouragement [24:51]

Episode Highlights

“As I truly believe everything else we talk about, right the X’s and O’s, whether it’s investing, insurance, debt repayment, tax planning, whatever it may be, all that stems from understanding and improving our own financial IQ.” – Tim Ulbrich [4:07]

“Life happens, and you want to be prepared. I want to be prepared so that those bumps don’t derail momentum and progress in other areas. The last thing we want is that we feel like we’re finally making progress towards building wealth, saving, investing for the future, achieving the goals that we’ve desired to achieve, and all of a sudden, we haven’t prepared for an emergency, and something sets us backwards and disrupts that momentum.” – Tim Ulbrich [5:00]

“Your six figure income – it’s a great tool, but it is not a financial plan. Without a vision and a plan, that good income is only going to go so far.” – Tim Ulbrich [27:51]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich  00:00

Hey everybody. Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, I’m flying solo with an episode that is short and to the point. One that distills a lot of learning from my own journey and from speaking with 1000s of pharmacists about their financial plans. I’ve taken those experiences and narrowed it down to a list of 10 financial moves that are key in building a strong financial foundation. Think of these as the prerequisites to building wealth and living your rich life. So whether you’re just getting started and have the opportunity to build a strong financial foundation from jump street, or perhaps you’ve been at it for a while, and sense the need to reinforce that foundation, this week’s episode is for you. And if you’re looking to identify areas within your own financial plan that could use some love and attention, we’ve got a great free resource for you. We created a five minute financial fitness test so that you can learn about the areas of your financial plan that you may need to work on, where you’re doing well, and resources that can help along the way. So head on over to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/fitness and see how your financial health is tracking. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/fitness will also provide the link in the show notes. 

Tim Ulbrich  01:25

All right, let’s jump right into our list of 10 moves to make to become financially fit. Number one on our list is be a sponge. Be a sponge. This is intentionally number one on the list as a consistent commitment to learning, I believe, is going to yield the greatest return on your investment. The earlier you learn, the higher the return on investment of your time. At most, some pharmacy schools offer a personal finance elective but the vast majority have little to no personal finance that’s embedded in the curriculum, whether that’s at the graduate or the undergraduate or even the K through 12, although we see that expanding more recently. While you don’t need a master’s degree in finance to be successful with your money, you should have the basic knowledge that helps you make good decisions and develop good habits. Read books, listen to podcasts, watch YouTube videos, whatever works for you. Some of my favorite personal finance books that have had the most impact on my journey include Rich Dad, Poor Dad by Robert Kiyosaki;  I Will Teach You To Be Rich, by Ramit Sethi; The Millionaire Next Door, by Tom Stanley; Money: Master the Game by Tony Robbins; and of course, I’d be remiss if I didn’t mention the book that we wrote, Tim Church and I co authored, Seven Figure Pharmacist. These resources, as well as many other podcasts for me in my own journey, were instrumental to just developing that hunger and habit to learn, recognizing that there’s always an opportunity to grow, right? This is a journey. This is a marathon. This is not a sprint when it comes to long term financial success, and we have to put the work in to make sure that we’re upping our financial IQ over time. So be a sponge. When I think about some of the guests that have been on this show recently, right Brandon Gerleman on last week’s episode 376, that shared his debt free journey paying off about $160,00 of debt. Or Dr. Manny on Episode 375, a new practitioner that has opened up his own community pharmacy, is building his business. Or Mike Beyer from 365 who shared his story, going from a net worth of zero to becoming a Seven Figure Pharmacist. These are just a few of the stories, but one consistent theme and thread that I think of from their journeys is that they really believe there is no arrived. There is no arrive. When it comes to the financial plan, they are hungry to learn, to grow, despite the success that they have, they recognize there’s always an opportunity to learn, to improve and to grow. So that’s number one on our list. As I truly believe everything else we talk about, right the X’s and O’s, whether it’s investing, insurance, debt repayment, tax planning, whatever it may be, all that stems from understanding and improving our own financial IQ. 

Tim Ulbrich  04:22

Number two on our list is make a commitment to live off of less than you make. Make a commitment to live off of less than you make. Outside of learning, outside of being a sponge, this is at the top of the list because other goals require cash flow. It’s that simple, right? If we want to pay off debt, if we want to save and invest for the future, if we want to invest in experiences and travel, whatever goals we have, they’re dependent on cash flow. And cash flow comes from living off of less than we make now, easier said than done. Many of you know that firsthand, but until we figure out ways to take off the cap on our income. We’ll talk about that here in a little bit. The cash flow will come from the difference between what you earn and what you spend. The financial plan is this simple and this hard right. Executing, of course, is the hard part. But without cash flow and without a monthly system, we’re going to talk about that here in a little bit as well. We’re going to find ourselves spinning our wheels financially long term, right? We want to implement a system that from the breathing room and the cash flow that we create, we’re able to fund our goals each and every month, and know that we have a process in place for those goals, the dreams that we have to become a reality. So that’s number two on our list. Make a commitment to live off of less than you make.

Tim Ulbrich  05:48

Number three, you’ve heard me say it many times on the show before, build an emergency fund. This is not just about the dollars in the account. It’s about the breathing room that this creates in your financial plan, getting out of the day to day, month to month, year to year, mindset, and ensuring that we can have the peace of mind. So if you haven’t already done this, open up a high yield savings account or money market account that is separate – keywords – separate from your checking account, and label it as your emergency fund. One of these, my partner, Tim Baker, often says is, hey, if you’re doing the mental accounting, do the actual accounting. What does he mean by that? He means that if we’re looking at our funds, let’s say you’ve got 20, 30, $40,000 that’s sitting in a high yield savings account, or perhaps in a checking account. Hopefully not the case. But if we know that, hey, about five or 10 of that is for an emergency fund. About five or 10 of that is for an upcoming trip, about 10 of that is for a future roof replacement in the home, right? That’s the mental accounting. So if we’re doing that, let’s create the buckets here. We’re talking an emergency fund, label it and do the actual counting of putting it in a fund that is earmarked specifically for the emergency fund. Now we’re going to want to work towards saving three to six months of essential expenses. That’s our goal. That’s our target, general rule of thumb. But don’t let that number overwhelm you if you’re just getting started, or perhaps you’re doing some cleanup work in other parts of the financial plan, because here’s the reality, if you’ve never had an unexpected car or medical expense or another emergency, it’s only a matter of time. Life happens, and you want to be prepared. I want to be prepared so that those bumps don’t derail momentum and progress in other areas. he last thing we want is that we feel like we’re finally making progress towards building wealth, saving, investing for the future, achieving the goals that we’ve desired to achieve, and all of a sudden, we haven’t prepared for an emergency, and something sets us backwards and disrupts that momentum. Now here are five questions that I think you need to answer for your emergency fund, just to get you started and hopefully to get you on track. Number one is adequately funded. We talked about that general rule of thumb, three to six months of essential expenses, not all expenses, essential expenses. So what does that mean? Housing, food, transportation, clothing, minimum debt payments, things that you would continue to fund, even in the event of a short term job loss or emergency add those up. Multiply them by three to six. That’s a general target we’re shooting for with an emergency fund. So that’s question. One, is it adequately funded? Number two, a problem, but a good problem to have is, do you have too much saved in an emergency fund? I’ve talked with several pharmacists that have done a great job saving, but big numbers in an emergency fund, and ideally, we would put these funds, probably elsewhere, to use in the financial plan now, right now, because of where interest rates are at, it’s not a terrible option to have money sitting in an account earning four to 5% in high yield savings account. But if we have other high interest rate debt, or we’re looking to build up our long term investing or savings, there is an opportunity costs that can come from having too much saved in an emergency fund. So that’s question two. Number three, are you optimizing your emergency fund? So what I’m talking about here is making sure it’s not sitting in a checking account, that we have it working for us, especially with where interest rates are at right now. Whether that be a high yield savings account or money market account. You know, right now, at the time of this recording, most of those are in the four to 5% range. So are we optimizing that fund. Number four is, does it need a boost? So this is something that we can set it but forget it, and we have to come back and look at this, right? So, you know, especially for those that are earlier in their career, where expenses creep at a rapid rate, right? Perhaps when you when you graduated, maybe you didn’t have a home, or you didn’t have a family, all of a sudden you wake up in 3, 4, 5, years, our expenses have gone up significantly. So we want to visit this, revisit this at least once a year, and maybe at one point you hit that target of three to six months. But do we need to look at it again? And finally, our fifth question here. Is, as I mentioned already, is it separate from our everyday checking account? Right? If we’re doing the mental accounting, let’s do the actual accounting. So that’s number three on our list, build an emergency fund. 

Tim Ulbrich  10:11

Number four on our list of 10 moves to make to become financially fit, develop a plan to eliminate any high interest rate revolving credit card debt, or any high interest rate revolving consumer debt. Now, if you don’t have any revolving, high interest rate consumer debt, credit card debt, high interest rate, car loans, etc, great, right? Let’s move on. But if you do, baby steps, baby steps, this, along with the emergency fund, is really a top priority, given the interest rates this debt often demands, right, especially when talking about credit card typically north of 20% we have to plug this hole before we can start playing offense with other parts of the plan. Now, I know that sounds obvious, but I see this mistake commonly made, where because student loan debts there’s there’s an emotional burden there, or because there’s a feeling that I need to catch up and save and invest for the future, we can often get these priorities mixed up, right? So if I have high interest rate credit card debt that’s accruing interest north of 20% but I’m paying down debt at 5% 6% whether that be student loans, or I’m trying to save and invest in various retirement accounts. I may have those out of order, right? So we got to look at that. Now. Last thing I want to say here is, if you have credit card debt, know that you aren’t alone. Okay? We often think that, hey, all my other pharmacist friends have this figured out. They’re making a great income. I’m the only one with credit card debt, I can assure you that is not the case. This is a fairly common struggle that we see, especially with new practitioners. Although others are not immune to this, but there’s a lot of expenses that ramp up in that final year of pharmacy school, or those that transition into residency or fellowship. High cost of living areas. There’s a tendency to accrue some credit card debt at the end of that training program. So know that you’re not alone doesn’t mean or minimize that we have work to be done. Of course we do, but you aren’t alone, and we got to really start to begin to tackle this. So that’s number four, develop a plan to eliminate any high interest rate revolving consumer debt. 

Tim Ulbrich  12:15

Number five is we have to get clear on determining what is the best student loan repayment strategy for you. Now, if you’re listening and you have no student loans, you’re further along in your career. Great. Keep moving on, right? But for those that do have student loans, this is often a huge piece of the puzzle that we have to figure out, given the magnitude of it so that we can then plan around it. Because what you’ll notice, if you’re not already aware, especially when it comes to federal student loan repayment, there are a variety of options that can result in either big, big, big monthly payments or much smaller monthly payments, depending on which repayment plan you choose. And so we have to understand what fits into the budget. What is ideal, what is optimal for your situation, so that we can then plan and budget around it. Now, the median debt load for a pharmacy graduate here in 2024 covering right around $160,000 and for many grads, this is one of the most important and overwhelming decisions that they’re going to make. And to be fair, this is way more complicated than it needs to be, both on the federal and the private side. For those of you that have private loans. And to make that worse, this is just a hot mess right now, right. There’s a lot of changes that are going on with student loan repayment, a lot of uncertainty. The Save program has been held up. We don’t know what’s going to happen with that in the future. And by the way, we’re in the midst of a presidential election where student loans are often discussed and used in terms of political jockeying, so there’s a lot of unknown, which means for a lot of borrowers, it’s kind of a wait and see. Right now, it’s a wait and see for many people. So if you’re not already plugged into Studentaid.gov, make sure you get plugged in. We’ll link to that in the show notes so that you can stay up to date. We’ll also try to bring information here on our channels with what’s happening with student federal student loan repayment. But again, given the size, given the magnitude, notice, I didn’t say debt free, and I was intentional there, because for some of you, this is going to be a loan forgiveness pathway. But what I did say is we have to get clear on what our strategy is. We don’t want to be wandering when it comes to how we’re approaching our student loan. So once we can determine what is the optimal repayment strategy, we can then figure out what does that mean for a monthly payment. And then, as I mentioned, we can begin to build around that. So that’s number five, determine your student loan repayment strategy. Number six is, start tracking your net worth. Start tracking your net worth now if you’re early in your journey, especially if you have student loan debt or credit card debt, you’re not going to like this number, right? Because it’s a number that’s going to highlight especially if we have a high amount of debt that hey. We make a good income, but we’re probably not at the point we would like to be in terms of our overall financial health. Net worth is your assets or what you own minus your liabilities or what you owe. And I believe this is a much better indicator of your financial health than is your income, right? Because your income a six figure income. It’s a tool, but it’s not a financial plan, and it’s a tool that we can leverage to grow our net worth by paying down our debts and growing our assets that are hopefully compounding over time, but net worth is really going to shine a light on are we or are we not making progress. And so understanding and respecting this calculation can propel your financial plan. I really think about this as the 20,000 foot view on what’s going on for Jess and I in our own financial plan. So this is something that we’re tracking monthly. Very easy to do. I’ll share with you the template that we use. If you go to your financial pharmacist.com/toolbox. You’ll see a network tracking sheet there. You can save a copy for yourself, edit it. Nothing complicated. You can set up your own sheet as well. It’s a simply a listing of all the accounts that we have, checking savings, retirement accounts, real estate accounts, etc. Add up all the assets, subtract the liabilities. Amount that’s due. That’s our net worth. We’re tracking that over time to make sure that we’re heading in the right direction. If you’re not already doing this, even if you don’t like the number implement a system a recurring task to track your net worth each and every month. That’s number six on our list of 10 moves to make to become financially fed. 

Tim Ulbrich  16:36

Number seven is determine what insurance policies you do and do not need and do not need is perhaps equally as important. And while there are a lot of different types of insurance to consider here, I’m talking in specifically about three that I see get overlooked most by many pharmacists: professional liability and having your own professional liability insurance policy independent of your employer. Term life and long term disability. With the latter two, term life, long term disability, we’ve got to be thinking about what coverage we need in addition to what our employer policies are providing, not only to plus those up if they’re not enough, but also we got to remember that those policies aren’t going with us when we transition jobs, right and so as time goes on, as we get older, these policies typically become more expensive. So if we can lock these in in terms of our own independent Term Life policies, long term disability policies, while we’re younger and we can get the coverage we need, that’s probably going to be the best action that we can take. Now, when it comes to long term disability, you put a lot of time, energy and effort to be able to become a pharmacist and make a good income, and that’s why it’s so important to protect it. Disability Insurance for pharmacists is really income insurance. It’s addressing what would you do and the event that you’re unable to work as a pharmacist, right on the term life insurance side, what we’re trying to do there is especially if we have dependents or someone else that relies upon our income, in the event that you were to prematurely pass away, and that income is needed. What is that term life insurance policy going to produce? What expenses is it going to cover both short and long term now, we’ve got more information and resources on all of this. You can check those out at our website, yourfinancialpharmacist.com, I’ll link to a couple resources we have specifically on term life and long term disability in the show notes; guides that we’ve written specifically for pharmacists, what you do need, what you don’t need. Make sure to check those out. That’s number seven on our list. Determine what insurance policies you do and do not need. 

Tim Ulbrich  18:54

Number eight is we have to start investing as early as we possibly can. Now I know we’ve all been told this, but again, as with many of these items easier said than done, because when you’re flooded with things like student loans and other debt, it can be hard to balance prioritizing investing, and it’s easy to fall into the trap and perhaps feel that you can put off retirement savings for a few years, but the reality is that you want to take advantage of compound interest, time, value of money, and the earlier you start contributing, the better. And your investing strategy, it’s going to evolve over time. It’s going to get more complicated. But don’t succumb to inaction, because you’re overwhelmed with all the options. Start typically, what we’re focused on is starting with the employer match to a, 401K or 403B, 401 k, for those that you work work for a for profit, 403B for those that you work for a non profit, assuming that you’re there long enough to be vested, that’s a key factor we have to look at. And then we’re going to build from there, right? We’re going to look at things like IRAs Traditional and Roth IRAs, typically. Roth IRAs for pharmacists. HSAs health savings account and other investment vehicles along the way as well. We have talked extensively on the show about various investing strategies, long term retirement plan strategies, so make sure to check out those episodes for more information. 

Tim Ulbrich  20:17

Number nine on our list of 10 moves to make to become financially fit is refuse to accept your income is fixed. Now, common misperception I see among many pharmacists is that there is a ceiling on their income, and that mindset can lead to stagnation. Stagnation. It can lead to career dissatisfaction, and it can really limit on what is possible. So whether it’s pursuing additional opportunities within your organization, or perhaps for some of you, it’s starting a side hustle or business or investing in real estate, these are just a few of the many examples of how pharmacists are taking the ceiling off of their income potential. Bob Berg, the author of the Go Giver, said that your income is determined by how many people you serve and how well you serve them. I believe that to be true, whether it’s people that start their own business, whether that’s people that get started in real estate and develop great collaborations and partnerships, or whether that’s folks within their own organization that really are able to demonstrate and provide the value that then unlocks additional opportunities for them. So that’s number nine, refuse to accept your income as fixed because,

Tim Ulbrich  21:25

as we talked about earlier, all financial goals stem from the cash flow that we create by living off of less than we make. One way to do that is cut expenses. The other way we’re talking about here in our ninth point is growing our income. 

Tim Ulbrich  21:37

And finally, number 10 on our list of 10 moves to become financially fit, implement systems and automation as soon as possible. Now, if you’ve listened to the show for a while, you know that I love automation, and Ramit Sethi he talks about this in his book, I Will Teach You be Rich when he says, and I agree that automation can be the single most profitable system that you ever build. And as you’re getting started, it’s the process, not the outcome. It’s the process that’s most important. Remember, this is a marathon, not a sprint, and building and automating a system is ultimately what’s going to allow you to identify and fund your goals. You are directing your financial plan rather than reacting to it. That’s what we’re talking about here with automation. And it’s so apparent, so effective, so easy to implement, but it’s vastly underutilized. It involves essentially scheduling the transfer of funds to predefined goals, and doing so confidently, knowing that you’ve already accounted for it in your monthly spending plan. That’s what we’re talking about with automation. So whether it’s paying down your debt more aggressively through extra payments, whether it’s saving and investing money to an IRA or another type of investment account, whether it’s putting money towards a down payment on a home or investment property, whatever the goal is that we’ve identified and we account for in our monthly spending plan, once we identify that goal, automation, the next step here is to move those funds after we get paid, rather than waiting to see if there’s money left over, right? It’s proactive versus reactive. Sure, it takes a little bit of time to set up, but once it’s set up, it provides a long term return on your time, benefit and peace of mind, knowing that you have thought about, you’ve prioritized and you have a plan that is working itself to fund your goals. Do not underestimate how powerful that can be in terms of momentum and confidence. Now, what does this actually look like? So for my wife and I, we have a high yield savings account. We use Ally for all our online banking, this is not commercial for Ally, but in our high yield savings account within that, we have various buckets, and we name them according to the goals that we’re setting out to achieve. Now, of course, if there’s anything that I want to go directly to an account, not to sit in a high yield savings account, right? Perhaps this would be funding a Roth IRA or a brokerage account, or putting money into 529, those are going to be automated directly to that account. But for anything else, as I mentioned before, the mental accounting and the actual accounting, for example, this year we’re finishing, right now, a basement remodel project. So we have a bucket in our high yield savings account for a basement remodel. It could be a vacation. It could be the next car purchase. It could be gifts that you are funding throughout the year. It could be your insurance, homeowners or auto insurance that you pay once a year, twice a year, that you save up through throughout the year. Right? Any of these goals, we can create a bucket, and we can automate the contribution of the funds to that, and then we can see, and have a visual representation of what our goals are, and whether we’re not or not, we’re on track to achieve those. So this system, it took us about 15 minutes to set up, and could just as easily be achieved, probably through your own bank, or if they don’t have a bucket tool like that, through tracking in a simple spreadsheet. Again, resources I have that you can see more of our system. You go to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/toolbox, feel free to download any of those templates or resources and make them your own. 

Tim Ulbrich  25:06

Now, if you’re someone that’s listening, that’s feeling perhaps financially stressed or stuck or overwhelmed or confused or anxious, whether you’re a new practitioner, mid career, approaching retirement, or maybe you’re wondering, why am I not further along? Right? I’ve earned a good income, or I am earning a good income. Why am I not further along? I want you to close your eyes for a moment, unless you’re driving, of course, don’t do that and imagine a scenario where you are regularly investing in time to enhance your financial IQ, whether that’s reading, podcast, whatever you’re consistently learning and growing in this area. I want you to imagine where you have a fully funded emergency fund, where you have the peace of mind knowing that you have a backstop in place. I want you to imagine a scenario where if you have any high interest rate revolving debt, that that’s gone, and for other debt, you have a plan in place for how that’s going to be paid off and where that fits in the budget. I want you to imagine a scenario where you’re regularly tracking your net worth over time each and every month. I want you to imagine a scenario where you’re saving and investing each month and hopefully growing that each month, taking advantage of compound interest and time value of money. I want you to imagine a scenario where you’re advocating and negotiating for your income to be commensurate with the value that you’re providing and the confidence that can come from that. And I want you to imagine for a moment that you have a system in place that is accounting for and automatically funding your goals each month. And as you imagine those things. How does that feel? What emotions are coming up, and how does that contrast against those feelings of feeling stressed or stuck or overwhelmed, confused, anxious, notice that there is nothing complicated about what I have shared today. Sure, there’s a time and place for more advanced strategies, many of which we have talked about on this show, but first we have to do the foundational work that will put us in the position to take some calculated risk. And this just this isn’t just new practitioner stuff, right? I know many pharmacists, myself included, that sometimes we have to go back to the foundations, whether we’ve been out five years, 15 years or 25 years. And while all of this is pretty straightforward, you and I both know that executing consistently over time is a different challenge. So let me wrap up by saying that if you could use some help and guidance, we have a team of certified financial planners and tax professionals at YFP that can help. Your six figure income. It’s a great tool, but as I’ve said already once on this show, it is not a financial plan without a vision and a plan that good income is only going to go so far. That’s why, in part, I started Yfp back in 2015 because at Yfp, we support pharmacists at every stage of their careers to take control their finances, reach their financial goals and build wealth through comprehensive fee only financial planning and tax planning. Our team of certified financial planners and tax professionals work with pharmacists all across the country and help our clients set their future selves up for success while living a rich life today, both are important. So if you’re ready to see how yp can help support you on your financial journey, you can visit your financial pharmacist.com, and at the top right, you’ll see an option to book a discovery call that will take you to a scheduling page to book a meeting with my partner, a 60 minute meeting. Tim Baker, fee only, certified financial professional, where we’ll talk and learn about your situation, your goals, what’s working, what’s not working. We’ll share more about our services, and from there, we can determine whether or not those are good fit again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com, at the top right, you’ll see an option there to click on book a discovery call. Thank you so much for listening to this week’s episode. If you found this information helpful, do me a favor. Share this with a friend and colleague and leave us a review on Apple Podcasts which will help others find the show. Have a great rest of your day, and we’ll catch you again next week. Take care.

Tim Ulbrich  29:14

 As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only, and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyzes expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer, Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]